electrical and control engineering(ii) - arab academy for science
TRANSCRIPT
COL L EGE OF ENGINEER I NG AND TECHNOL OGY
Arab Academy for Science, Technology and
Maritime Transport
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING B. Sc. Program
Status Report: Volume II December 2009
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E PO R T
Electrical and Control Engineering
Prepared by Departmental Committee and Coordinated by
Prof. Dr. Hussein El Desouki
Head of Department Department of Electrical and Control Engineering
D E C E M B E R 2 0 0 9
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
INDUSTRIAL AND MANAGEMENT ENGINEERING i
DEPAR TMENT VISION/MI SSION STATEMENTS
Vision
The vision of the B. Sc. electrical and control engineering program is to provide a high quality electrical and control engineering education leading to graduate engineers capable of performing planning, design, installation, operation, control, and maintenance of modern large electrical power systems and high advanced control applications.
Mission
The mission of the electrical and control program can be summarized in the following points:
To provide high quality education in electrical and control engineering with continuously pursuing the best teaching methods, facilities and advanced technologies.
To advance electrical engineering science and technology by combining basic knowledge with innovative applications of engineering.
To prepare graduates who are able to work efficiently, accurately in the field of electrical and control engineering.
To produce future leaders for electrical industries, academia, governmental organizations and society whose vision is based on fundamental knowledge, analytical methods, engineering, technical skills, creativity, perspective and ethics.
To provide and support electrical and control engineering research leading to expansion of knowledge to ensure high quality education.
To contribute actively in nation's pursuit towards a diverse and sustainable economy by fostering and opening technology transfer channels.
To provide technical expertise and training to industrial and governmental firms.
DEPAR TMENT OBJECTIVE S
The first objective is to impart to students the type of technical and engineering knowledge which reflects the immediate technological needs and practical 'skills required to produce power and control engineers who are capable of making a positive contribution to their countries and their communities as soon as possible after graduation. In particular it aims at satisfying the pressing need of the national industries (both governmental and private) and National Electricity Boards in both Arab and African countries for such engineers in the area of power system planning and operation, power generation, transmission, distribution, utilization and automatic control.
The second objective is to incorporate in the curricula the latest front- line topics such as reliability, neural networks, digital protection, digital control etc., together with the more conventional topics. This will enable graduates to rapidly assimilate the rapid technological advancements incorporated in modern equipment as well as the advanced analytical techniques used for design and performance analysis.
The third objective is that the degree plan satisfy the requirements of the Higher Council for Universities, the IEE institute and the ABET.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
INDUSTRIAL AND MANAGEMENT ENGINEERING ii
Table of Contents
I N T R O D U C T I O N 1
Electrical and Automatic Control Engineering:
An Overview 1 The Role of Electrical and Control Engineers 1 Career Opportunities for Electrical and
Control Engineers 1 Program Aim and Objectives 2 Program Intended Learning Outcomes (ILOs) 2
P R O G R A M P L A N N I N G S H E E T 4
Curriculum 4 Course Coding 4 Degree Offered 5 Graduation Requirements 5 Electrical and Control Engineering Academic
Program Sheet 8 Course Prerequisites 10 Academic Program Analysis 24 Program Analysis by Semester Offering 30 Program Analysis by Subject Field 33 Comparison with Previous Program 38
C O U R S E S S U M M A R Y
D E S C R I P T I O N 3 9
Basic and Applied Science (BA) 39 Computer Engineering (CC) 41 Electronics Engineering (EC) 42 Electrical Engineering (EE) 42 Industrial and Management Engineering (IM) 52 Language, Humanities and Social Science
(LH) 53 Mechanical Engineering (ME) 54 Non-Engineering (NE) 55
C O U R S E F I L E S U M M A R Y 5 6
Basic and Applied Science Courses – BA 57
Computer Engineering Courses – CC 79 Electronics Engineering Courses – EC 89 Electrical and Control Engineering Courses –
EE 93 Electrical machines Courses Group 129 Electrical Circuits Courses Group 151 Electrical Power Courses Group 165 Industrial and Management Engineering
Courses – IM 193 Language, Humanities, & Social Science
Courses – LH 201 Mechanical Engineering Courses – ME 207 Non Engineering Courses – NE 215
T E A C H I N G F A C U L T Y L I S T 2 2 1
Full Time Staff 221 Assistants 228
D E P A R T M E N T F A C I L I T I E S 2 2 9
Experimental Facilities Supporting the
Program 229 Electrical Machines Laboratory 31 Electrical Circuits Laboratory 33 Digital Automatic Control Laboratory 234 Analogue Automatic Control Laboratory 235 Electrical Drives Laboratory 236 Automation Laboratory 237 Physics I Laboratory 238 Physics II Laboratory 239 Computer Laboratories I 240 Computer Laboratories II 241 Computer Laboratories III 242 Chemistry Laboratory 243 Testing of Materials Laboratory 244 Engineering Workshop 245 Microprocessor Laboratory 246 Digital Circuits Laboratory 247
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 1
Introduction
Program overview, activities and job opportunities, and program objectives
Electrical and Automatic Control Engineering: An
Overview
Electrical and Automatic Control Engineering is an important field of engineering dealing with the study of operation, design and control of power systems, drives and control systems. By covering a range of topics such as power, electronics, control systems and signal processing specific objectives can be achieved.
It is well Known that the degree of development of a nation is measured by its per capital consumption of electrical energy i.e. electrical energy utilization. The generation of electricity, its transmission and its distribution are thus of primary concern to all developing and rapidly industrializing countries. Since it is estimated that some 80% of generated power is used to drive motors, machines, electrical drives and power electronics (form a very important part of electrical power engineering).
The Role of Electrical and Control Engineers
With electrification projects forging ahead in developing countries and peak demand forecast doubling every ten years, there is a pressing need for expert generation, transmission and distribution engineers. Also under study by Arab and African countries are projects for the formation of super grids linking all nations from Iraq in the east to Morocco in the west and from North Africa across the continent to South Africa across with eventual interconnection with Europe. The scope of electrical power engineering is thus very wide indeed and power engineers are required to be knowledgeable in both conventional and frontline topics.
Automatic control systems are not only responsible for the modern way of life; they have indeed revolutionized all aspects of both civil and military life. Its industrial applications have speeded up the production and improved the quality of a very large number of manufactured goods. In power systems the wide use of automatic control systems has added to the reliability, stability and economy of generation, transmission and distribution systems.
Career Opportunities for Electrical and Control Engineers
Quick survey of engineering job vacancies at the daily newspaper reveals that Electrical and Control Engineering would collect almost 35% of the total engineering opportunities available. In fact
Chapter
1
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 2
Electrical and Control Engineering department main objectives are to introduce a qualified engineer to serve in the field of:
Generation, transmission, distribution and utilization of electrical power for public and private sectors to secure both continuous and emergency demands.
Electrical power feeding for civil and military marine and aviation utilities.
Electrical works in construction engineering.
Renewable stand-alone generation systems for isolated communities.
Automated industrial systems where computer controlled systems are applied such as paper industry, steel production and fabrication industries, chemicals, petrochemicals & medicine production industries, spinning & weaving, food production industries ….etc.
Traction and lifting utilities.
Electrical drives for all aspects of industry.
Program Aim and Objectives
Impart to students the type of technical and engineering knowledge which reflects the immediate technological needs and practical skills required to produce power and control engineering who are capable of making a positive contribution to their countries and their communities as soon as possible after graduation.
Satisfy the pressing need of the national industries (both governmental and private) and National Electricity Boards in both Arab and African countries for such engineers in the area of power system planning and operation, power generation, transmission, distribution, utilization and automatic control.
Incorporate in the curricula the latest front- line topics such as reliability, neural networks, digital protection, digital control etc., together with the more conventional topics. This will enable graduates to rapidly assimilate the rapid technological advancements incorporated in modern equipment as well as the advanced analytical techniques used for design and performance analysis.
The responsibility of achieving this objective is carried out by electrical engineering staff experienced in the management of engineering and technical activities.
Program Intended Learning Outcomes (ILOs)
Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of the electrical engineering (EE) program of study, the graduate should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
Construction, design and theory of operation of electrical machinery and electronics.
Design and analysis of power system generation, transmission and distribution.
Analysis, design and implementation of various methods of control using analogue and digital control systems.
Construction, design and implementation of computerized control system using various digital controllers
Applying power and control theories accompanied with digital signal processing in electrical drives systems for commercial and industrial automated systems applications.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 3
Intellectual Skills
On completion of the electrical engineering (EE) program of study, students should be able to:
Select and apply appropriate computer based methods, mathematical and scientific principles for analysing of control systems.
Solve a wide range of problems related to the analysis, design, and construction of electrical machines, control systems and power systems
Ability to design automation systems for industrial applications
Practical and Professional Skills
On completion of the electrical engineering (EE) program of study, students should be able to:
Plan and undertake a major individual project.
Prepare and deliver coherent and structured verbal and written technical reports.
Give technical presentations suitable for the time, place and audience.
Use the scientific literature effectively and make discriminating use of Web resources.
Use appropriate computer-based support tools for problem-solving and analysis of results.
Apply the acquired skills in a commercial or industrial environment.
Display an integrated approach to the deployment of communication skills.
Use IT skills and display mature computer literacy.
Work effectively with and for others.
Display personal responsibility by working to multiple deadlines in complex activities.
Demonstrate significantly enhanced group working abilities.
Further develop career plans and personal objectives.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 4
Program Planning Sheet
New program structure including the suggested new course titles and codes and comparison between this program and the previous one
Curriculum
The program curriculum provides great flexibility in course selection and offers a broad scientific and engineering base by containing a sequence of courses in mathematics, physics, chemistry, computer and the engineering sciences. These courses are accompanied by electrical engineering courses covering the areas of electrical measurements and instrumentation, control systems, power systems, power electronics, microprocessor based control, electrical machines, electrical drives and automated industrial systems.
Course Coding
Numbering System
The course code consists of five alphanumeric digits (MN XYZ), as follows:
The MN digits: Represent the abbreviations of the subject field.
The X digit: Represents the course level or the year at which the course is offered in the plan of study.
The Y digit: Represents the course group.
The Z digit: Represents the course sequence number within the group.
Abbreviations of Subject Fields
The following abbreviations of subject fields are used in the degree offered and graduation requirements and course summary description sections of this report; and are listed below in an alphabetical order:
BA – Basic and Applied Science.
CC – Computer Engineering.
EE – Electrical Engineering.
LH – Language, Humanities and Social Science.
IM – Industrial and Systems Engineering.
ME – Mechanical Engineering.
NE – Non-Engineering Courses.
Chapter
2
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 5
Electrical and Control Engineering Subject Field Groups
The Electrical and Control Engineering (EE) subject field offers courses in the following four groups:
Automatic Control Group (EE X1X)
Electrical Machines Group (EE X2X)
Electrical Circuits Group (EE X3X)
Electrical Power Group (EE X4X)
Degree Offered
The program offers the degree of Bachelor of Science (B. Sc.) in Industrial and Systems Engineering. The candidate for the (B. Sc.) degree is required to pursue scholastic quality and complete a plan of study prepared with his academic advisor and approved by the Industrial and Systems Engineering Department Council.
The number of credit hours required for graduation is 180 (cr. hr.) spreading over 10 academic semesters. The program contains a sequence of courses that are designed according to the National Academic Reference Standards (NARS) for electrical engineering.
Graduation Requirements
College Requirements
A total of 51 credit hours are required by the college as per the following table:
Su
bje
ct
Fie
ld
Sem
este
r
Co
urs
e
Co
de
Course Title Cr. Hr. Prerequisite
Compulsory Courses A total of 48 Cr. Hr. of the following compulsory courses
BA
1 BA 113 Physics (1) 3 None
2 BA 114 Physics (2) 3 BA 113
2 BA 118 Chemistry 2 None
1 BA 123 Mathematics (1) 3 None
2 BA 124 Mathematics (2) 3 BA 123
3 BA 223 Mathematics (3) 3 BA 124
4 BA 224 Mathematics (4) 3 BA 223
1 BA 141 Engineering Mechanics (1) 3 None
2 BA 142 Engineering Mechanics (2) 3 BA 141
CC 1 CC 111 Introduction to computer 3 None
2 CC 112 Structured Programming 3 CC 111
IM 1 IM 111 Industrial Relations 2 None
2 IM 112 Manufacturing Technology 2 None
3 IM 423 Operations Research 3 None
LH 1 LH 131 English for Special Purposes (1) 2 None
2 LH 132 English for Special Purposes (2) 2 LH 131
3 LH 231 Technical Report Writing 3 LH 132
ME 1 ME 151 Eng. Drawing and Projection 2 None
NE 4 NE 264 Scientific Thinking 3 None
5 NE 364 Engineering Economy 3 54 Cr. Hr.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 6
Department Requirements
A total of 129 credit hours are required by the department, which are distributed as follows: 102 credit hours of compulsory courses.
A minimum of 27 credit hours of department restricted electives that are selected from the three main course groups as follows:
Seven courses equivalent to 21credits from Group A & Group B.
Two courses equivalent to 6 credits from Group C.
Su
bje
ct
Fie
ld
Sem
este
r
Co
urs
e
Co
de
Course Title Cr. Hr. Prerequisite
Compulsory Courses A total of 96 Cr. Hr. of the following compulsory courses
BA 5 BA 323 Mathematics (5) 3 BA 224
6 BA 327 Probability & Numerical Methods 3 None
CC
3 CC 213 Programming Applications 3 CC 112
3 CC 216 Digital Logic Design 3 CC 111
3 CC 411 Introduction to Microprocessors 3 CC 216
EC 4 EC 238 Electronics (1) 3 EE 231
5 EC 339 Electronics (2) 3 EC 238
EE
3 EE 231 Electrical Circuits (1) 3 BA 124
4 EE 232 Electrical Circuits (2) 3 EE 231
4 EE 211 Electrical Meas. & Instrumentation (1) 3 EE 231
5 EE 312 Electrical Meas. & Instrumentation (2) 3 EE 211
5 EE 321 Electrical Machines (1) 3 EE 232
5 EE 341 Introduction to Power Engineering 3 EE 232
5 EE 332 Network Analysis 3 EE 232
6 EE 311 Fundamentals of Control Engineering 3 BA 224
6 EE 331 Electrical and Magnetic Fields (1) 3 BA 224
6 EE 322 Electrical Machines (2) 3 EE 321
6 EE 342 Power Systems (1) 3 EE 341
6 EE 421 Power Electronics (1) 3 EC 339
7 EE 333 Electrical and Magnetic Fields (2) 3 EE 331
7 EE 422 Electrical Machines (3) 3 EE 322
7 EE 423 Power electronics (2) 3 EE 421
7 EE 411 Control Systems (1) 3 EE 311
7 EE 441 Power Systems (2) 3 EE 342
8 EE 412 Control Systems (2) 3 EE 411
8 EE 413 Microprocessor Based Process Control 3 CC 411
8 EE 424 Electrical Drives (1) 3 EE 422
8 EE 442 Power Systems Protection (1) 3 EE 342
9 EE 501 Project (1) 3 S.S.*
10 EE 503 Project (2) 6 EE 501
ME 4 ME 234 Thermo-fluids 3 None
3 ME 274 Materials Science 3 BA 114:BA 142
8 ME 520 Power Plant Technology 3 ME 234
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 7
Su
bje
ct
Fie
ld
Sem
este
r
Co
urs
e
Co
de
Course Title Cr. Hr. Prerequisite
Department Restricted Electives At least nine courses (27 Cr. Hr.) from the following list of the college electives
Gro
up
A
9-10 EE 511 Discrete Control Systems 3 EE 412
9-10 EE 512 Automated Industrial Systems (1) 3 EE 411 OR EE 418
9-10 EE 513 Control Applications in Power Eng. 3 EE 412
9-10 EE 514 Robotics 3 CC 411 & EE 412
9-10 EE 515 Computer Control of Dynamic Systems 3 EE 411 OR EE 418
9-10 EE 516 Modern Control Systems 3 EE 412 OR EE 418
9-10 EE 517 Optimal & Adaptive Control 3 EE 412
9-10 EE 518 Automated Industrial Systems (2) 3 EE 412
Gro
up
B
9-10 EE 521 Special Electrical Machines 3 EE 422
9-10 EE 522 Electrical Drives (2) 3 EE 424
9-10 EE 541 Power System Protection (2) 3 EE 442
9-10 EE 542 Electrical Power Stations 3 EE 442
9-10 EE 543 Electrical Power Distribution 3 EE 442
9-10 EE 544 Power Systems (3) 3 EE 441
9-10 EE 545 High Voltage Engineering 3 EE 442
9-10 EE 546 Electrical Engineering Material 3 EE 442
9-10 EE 547 Utilization of Electrical Energy 3 EE 442
9-10 EE 548 Electromechanical Systems for Commercial Installation
3 EE 442
Gro
up
C
9-10 NE 467 Management of Energy Resources 3 None
9-10 IM 423 Operation Research 3 90 Cr Hr
9-10 IM 535 International Operations Management 3 126 Cr Hr
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 8
Academic Program Sheet
Year 1
Semester 1 Semester 2
LH 131 English for Special Purposes (1) LH 132 English for Special Purposes (2)
BA 123 Mathematics (1) BA 124 Mathematics (2)
BA 113 Physics (1) BA 114 Physics (2)
CC 111 Introduction to Computers CC 112 Structured Programming
ME 151 Eng. Drawing & Projection IM 112 Manufacturing Technology
BA 141 Engineering Mechanics (1) BA 142 Engineering Mechanics (2)
IM 111 Industrial Relations BA 118 Chemistry
Year 2
Semester 3 Semester 4
LH 231 Technical Report Writing BA 224 Mathematics (4)
CC 216 Digital Logic Design ME 234 Thermo-fluids
BA 223 Mathematics (3) EE 232 Electrical Circuits (2)
ME 274 Material Science EC 238 Electronics (1)
CC 213 Programming Applications EE 211 Electrical Measurements & Inst. (1)
EE 231 Electrical Circuits (1) NE 264 Scientific Thinking
Year 3
Semester 5 Semester 6
BA 323 Mathematics (5) BA 327 Probability & Numerical Mathematics
EC 339 Electronics (2) EE 311 Fundamentals of Control Engineering
EE 312 Electrical Measurements & Inst. (2) EE 331 Electrical and Magnetic Fields (1)
EE 321 Electrical Machines (1) EE 322 Electrical Machines (2)
EE 341 Introduction to Power Engineering EE 342 Power Systems (1)
EE 332 Network Analysis EE 421 Power Electronics (1)
Year 4
Semester 7 Semester 8
CC 411 Introduction to Microprocessors ME 520 Power Plant Technology
EE 333 Electrical and Magnetic Fields (2) NE 364 Engineering Economy
EE 422 Electrical Machines (3) EE 412 Control Systems (2)
EE 423 Power Electronics (2) EE 413 Microprocessor Based Process Control
EE 411 Control Systems (1) EE 424 Electrical Drives (1)
EE 441 Power Systems (2) EE 442 Power Systems Protection (1)
IM 400 Practical Training
Year 5
Semester 9 Semester 10
EE501 Project (1) EE501 Project (1)
EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group A EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group A/B
EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group A EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group A/B
EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group B EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group A/B
EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group B EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group C
EE XXX Department Restricted Elective Group C
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 9
College Electives
NE 161 History of Science and Technology
NE 262 Business Ethics
NE 263 Managerial Communications
NE 266 Creativity and Innovation
NE 264 Scientific Thinking
NE 465 Aesthetics Education and Art Appreciation
NE 466 Environmental Science and Technology
Department Restricted Electives
Group A
EE 511 Discrete Control Systems
EE 512 Automated Industrial Systems 1
EE 513 Control Applications in Power Engineering
EE 514 Robotics
EE 515 Computer Control of Dynamic Systems
EE 516 Modern Control Systems
EE 517 Optimal & Adaptive Control
EE 518 Automated Industrial Systems 2
Group B
EE 521 Special Electrical Machines
EE 522 Electrical Drives 2
EE 541 Power System Protection 2
EE 542 Electrical Power Stations
EE 543 Electrical Power Distribution
EE 544 Power Systems 3
EE 545 High Voltage Engineering
EE 546 Electrical Engineering Material
EE 547 Utilization of Electrical Energy
EE 548 Electromechanical Systems for Commercial Installation
Group C
NE 467 Management of Energy Resources
IM 423 Operation Research
IM 535 International Operations Management
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 10
Course Prerequisites
Prerequisites List – Core Courses
Course Prerequisite
SEMESTER 1
YE
AR
1
BA 113 Physics 1 None
BA 123 Mathematics 1 None
BA 141 Engineering Mechanics 1 None
CC 111 Introduction to computer None
IM 111 Industrial Relations None
LH 131 English for Special Purposes 1 None
BA 118 Chemistry None
SEMESTER 2
BA 114 Physics 2 BA 113 Physics 1
ME 151 Eng. Drawing & Projection None
BA 124 Mathematics 2 BA 123 Mathematics 1
BA 142 Engineering Mechanics 2 BA 141 Engineering Mechanics 1
CC 112 Structured Programming CC 111 Introduction to computer
IM 112 Manufacturing Technology None
LH 132 English for Special Purposes 2 LH 131 English for Special Purposes 1
SEMESTER 3
YE
AR
2
BA 223 Mathematics 3 BA 124 Mathematics 2
CC 216 Digital Logic Design CC 111 Introduction to computer
LH 231 Technical Report Writing LH 132 English for Special Purposes 2
ME 274 Materials Science BA 114 BA 142
Physics 2 Engineering Mechanics 2
CC 213 Programming Applications CC 112 Structured Programming
EE 231 Electrical Circuits 1 BA 124 Mathematics 2
SEMESTER 4
BA 224 Mathematics 4 BA 223 Mathematics 3
ME 234 Thermo-fluids None
EE 232 Electrical Circuits 2 EE 231 Electrical Circuits 1
EC 238 Electronics 1 EE 231 Electrical Circuits 1
EE 211 Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation 1
EE 231 Electrical Circuits 1
NE 264 Scientific Thinking None
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 11
Course Prerequisite
SEMESTER 5
YE
AR
3
BA 323 Mathematics 5 BA 224 Mathematics 4
EC 339 Electronics 2 EC 238 Electronics 1
EE 312 Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation 2
EE 211 Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation 1
EE 321 Electrical Machines 1 EE 232 Electrical Circuits 2
EE 341 Introduction to Power Engineering EE 232 Electrical Circuits 2
EE 332 Network Analysis EE 232 Electrical Circuits 2
SEMESTER 6
BA 327 Statistics & Numerical Mathematics None
EE 311 Fundamentals of Control Engineering BA 224 Mathematics 4
EE 331 Electrical and Magnetic Fields 1 BA 223 Mathematics 4
EE 322 Electrical Machines 2 EE 321 Electrical Machines 1
EE 342 Power systems 1 EE 341 Introduction to Power Engineering
EE 421 Power Electronics 1 EC 339 Electronics 2
SEMESTER 7
YE
AR
4
CC 411 Introduction to Microprocessors CC 216 Digital Logic Design
EE 333 Electrical and Magnetic Fields 2 EE 331 Electrical and Magnetic Fields 1
EE 422 Electrical Machines 3 EE 322 Electrical Machines 2
EE 423 Power Electronics 2 EE 421 Power Electronics 1
EE 411 Control Systems 1 EE 311 Fundamentals of Control Engineering
EE 441 Power Systems 2 EE 342 Power Systems 1
SEMESTER 8
IM 400 Practical Training
ME 520 Power Plant Technology ME 234 Thermo-fluids
NE 364 Engineering Economy None
EE 412 Control Systems 2 EE 411 Control Systems 1
EE 413 Microprocessor Based Process Control CC 411 Introduction to Microprocessors
EE 424 Electrical Drives 1 EE 422 Electrical Machines 3
EE 442 Power Systems Protection 1 EE 342 Power Systems 1
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 12
Course Prerequisite
SEMESTER 9
EE 501 Senior Project I Senior Standing
YE
AR
5
2 Courses from Group A
2 Courses form Group B
1 Course from Group C
SEMESTER 10
EE 503 Senior Project II EE 501 Senior Project I
3 Courses from Group A & B
1 Course from Group C
Department Restricted Electives
Group A
EE 511 Discrete Control Systems EE 412 Control Systems 2
EE 512 Automated Industrial Systems (1) EE 412 EE 418
Control Systems 2 OR Automatic Control Systems
EE 513 Control Applications in Power Engineering
EE 412 Control Systems 2
EE 514 Robotics CC 411 EE 412
Introduction to Microprocessors Control Systems II
EE 515 Computer Control of Dynamic Systems EE 411 EE 418
Control Systems 1 OR Automatic Control Systems
EE 516 Modern Control Systems EE 412 EE 418
Control Systems 2 OR Automatic Control Systems
EE 517 Optimal & Adaptive Control EE 412 Control Systems 2
EE 518 Automated Industrial Systems (2) EE 412 Control Systems 2
Group B
EE 521 Special Electrical Machines EE 422 Electrical Machines 3
EE 522 Electrical Drives (2) EE 424 Electrical Drives 1
EE 541 Power System Protection (2) EE 442 Power Systems Protection 1
EE 542 Electrical Power Stations EE 442 Power System Protection 1
EE 543 Electrical Power Distribution EE 442 Power System Protection 1
EE 544 Power Systems (3) EE 441 Power Systems 2
EE 545 High Voltage Engineering EE 442 Power System Protection 1
EE 546 Electrical Engineering Material EE 442 Power System Protection 1
EE 547 Utilization of Electrical Energy EE 442 Power System Protection 1
EE 548 Electromechanical Systems for Commercial Installation
EE 442 Power System Protection 1
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 13
Course Prerequisite
Group C
NE467 Management of Energy Resources None
IM423 Operational Research 90 Cr Hr
IM535 International Operations Management 126 Cr Hr
The course prerequisites that are listed in the tables above are illustrated through a number of flowcharts that are to be used by advisors to guide the students through their program of study.
These flowcharts are organized as follows:
Figure 1 to Figure 3 show the courses and their relationship to each other (prerequisites) offered in the five years of study.
Figure 4 shows the elective courses and their relationship to each other (prerequisites).
Figure 5 to 8 show the courses within each course group and their relationship to each other (prerequisites) offered in the five years of study.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 16
IM 111Industrial Relations
IM 112 Manufacturing
Technology
BA 113Physics I
BA 123Math I
BA 141Engineering Mechanics I
CC 111Introduction to
Computer
LH 131ESP I
BA 114Physics II
BA 124Math II
BA 142Engineering Mechanics II
CC 112Structured
Programming
LH 132ESP II
BA 223Math III
BA 224Math IV
LH 231Technical Report
Writing
ME 151Eng. Drawing &
Projection
BA 118Chemistry
ME 274Materials Science
CC 216Digital Logic
Design
NE 264Scientific Thinking
ME 234Thermo-fluids
Year 1
Year 2
S 1
S 2
S 3
S 4
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
CC 213Programming Applications
EE 231Electrical Circuits I
EE 232Electrical Circuits II
EC 238Electronics I
EE 211Electrical
Measurements & Instrumentation I
Figure 1: Course prerequisites - Years 1 and 2
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 17
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
Year 3
BA 323Math V
EE 341Introduction to
Power Engineering
EC 339Electronics II
EE 332Network Analysis
EE 312Electrical
Measurements & Instrumentation II
EE 321Electrical
Machines I
BA 327Statistics & Numerical Methods
EE 311Fundamental of
Control Engineering
EE 331Electrical &
Magnetic Fields I
EE 342Power Systems I
EE 322Electrical
Machines II
EE 421Power Electronics I
CC 411Introduction to
Microprocessors
EE 422Electrical
Machines III
EE 333Electrical &
Magnetic Fields II
EE 411Control Systems I
EE 423Power Electronics
II
EE 441Power Systems II
EE 413Microprocessor Based Process
Control
EE 412Control Systems II
ME 520Power Plant Technology
NE 364Engineering
Economy
EE 424Electrical Drives I
Year 4
EE 442Power Systems
Protection I
S 5
S 6
S 7
S 8
BA 224 EC 238 EE 232EE 211CC 216 ME 234
54 Crd Hrs
Figure 2: Course prerequisites - Years 3 and 4
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 18
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
Year 5
S 9
S 10
EE 501Project 1
EE XXXDepartment
Restricted Elective
EE XXXDepartment
Restricted Elective
EE XXXDepartment
Restricted Elective
EE XXXDepartment
Restricted Elective
NE467Department
Restricted Elective
EE 503Project 2
EE XXXDepartment
Restricted Elective
EE XXXDepartment
Restricted ElectiveIM535
S.S.*
*Senior Standing (Semesters 9 and 10 only).
EE XXXDepartment
Restricted Elective
126 Crd Hrs
Figure 3: Course prerequisites - Year 5.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 19
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
EE 513Control
Applications in Power Engineering
EE 514Robotics
EE 511Discrete Control
Systems
EE 516Modern Control
Systems
EE 515Computer Control
of Dynamic Systems
EE 512Automated
Industrial Systems I
Group A
EE 412
Department Restricted Electives
*Senior Standing (Semesters 9 and 10 only).
EE 412
CC 411
EE 518Automated
Industrial Systems II
EE 517Optimal &
Adaptive ControlEE 544
Power Systems III
EE 522Electrical Drives II
EE 541Power System
Protection II
EE 542Electrical Power
Stations
EE 545High Voltage Engineering
EE 547Utilization of
Electrical Energy
Group B
EE 442
EE 441
EE 424
EE 543Electrical Power
Distribution
EE 546Electrical
Engineering Materials
EE 548Electromechanical
Systems for Commercial Installation
EE 521Special Electrical
Machines
Group C
EE 422 NE 467Management of
Energy Resources
IM 423Operational
Research
IM 535International Operations
Management
EE 412
EE 442
90 Crd Hrs
126 Crd Hrs
Figure 4: Course prerequisites - Department Restricted Electives
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 20
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
Group A
BA 123Math I
BA 223Math III
EE 411Control Systems I
EE 412Control Systems II
BA 124Math II
BA 224Math IV
EE 311Fundamental of
Control Engineering
EE 516Modern Control
Systems
EE 515Computer Control
of Dynamic Systems
EE 512Automated
Industrial Systems I
EE 518Automated
Industrial Systems II
EE 517Optimal &
Adaptive Control
EE 514Robotics
CC 411Introduction to
Microprocessors
CC 216Digital Logic
Design
CC 111Introduction to
Computer
EE 511Discrete Control
Systems
EE 513Control
Applications in Power Engineering
Figure 5: Course group prerequisites – Group A.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 21
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
Group B
BA 124Math II
EE 442Power Systems
Protection I
EE 342Power Systems I
EE 341Introduction to
Power Engineering
EE 232Electrical Circuits II
EE 231Electrical Circuits I
BA 123Math I
EE 542Electrical Power
Stations
EE 545High Voltage Engineering
EE 547Utilization of
Electrical Energy
EE 543Electrical Power
Distribution
EE 546Electrical
Engineering Materials
EE 548Electromechanical
Systems for Commercial Installation
EE 441Power Systems II
EE 544Power Systems III
EE 541Power System
Protection II
EE 321Electrical
Machines I
EE 322Electrical
Machines II
EE 422Electrical
Machines III
EE 424Electrical Drives I
EE 522Electrical Drives II
EE 521Special Electrical
Machines
Figure 6: Course group prerequisites – Group B.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 22
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
Group C
IM 535International Operations
Management
126 Cr Hr
NE 467Management of
Energy Resources
IM 423Operational
Research
90 Cr Hr 54 Crd Hrs
Figure 8: Course group prerequisites – Group C.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 23
IM 111
IM 112
EE 232
BA 113BA 123 BA 141CC 111 LH 131
BA 114BA 124 BA 142CC 112 LH 132
BA 223
BA 224
LH 231
BA 118
ME 151
EE 231 ME 274
EE 211
CC 216
NE 264
CC 213
ME 234EC 238
Year 1
Year 2
S 1
S 2
S 3
S 4
Year 3
BA 323EE 341EC 339 EE 332EE 312 EE 321
BA 327 EE 311EE 331EE 342EE 322EE 421
CC 411 EE 411EE 422 EE 333EE 423 EE 441
ME 520NE 364EE 413 EE 412EE 424
Year 4 EE 442
S 5
S 6
S 7
S 8
Year 5
S 9
S 10
EE 501 EE XXX
EE 503 EE XXX
EE XXX
EE XXX
EE XXX
EE XXX IM535
EE XXX NE467
Saturday, November 21, 2009
Page 1
Electrical and Control EngineeringAdvising Flowchart
S.S.*
*Senior Standing (Semesters 9 and 10 only).
126 Crd Hrs
54 Crd Hrs
Figure 7: Prerequisite flowchart
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 24
Academic Program Analysis
YEAR ONE
SEMESTER ONE
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit
Hours
Prerequisites
NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area*
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
BA113 Physics 1 2 0 2 3 None None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
BA118 Chemistry 2 0 2 2 None None 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2
BA123 Mathematics 1 2 2 0 3 None None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
BA141 Engineering Mechanics 1 2 2 0 3 None None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
CC111 Introduction to Computers 2 0 2 3 None None 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 3
IM111 Industrial Relations 2 2 0 2 None None 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
LH131 English 1 2 2 0 2 None None 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
Total 14 8 6 18 Total 4 11 1 0 2 0 0 18
SEMESTER TWO
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
BA114 Physics 2 2 0 2 3 BA113 None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
BA124 Mathematics 2 2 2 0 3 BA123 None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
BA142 Engineering Mechanics 2 2 2 0 3 BA141 None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
CC112 Structured Programming 2 0 2 3 CC111 None 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 3
IM112 Manufacturing Technology 1 0 2 2 None None 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 2
LH132 English 2 2 2 0 2 LH131 None 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
ME151 Engineering Drawing & Projection 2 2 0 2 None None 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 2
Total 13 8 6 18 Total 2 11 2 2 1 0 0 18
* A: Humanities and Social Sciences; B: Mathematics and Basic Sciences; C: Basic Engineering Sciences; D: Applied Engineering and Design; E: Computer Applications and ICT; F: Projects and Practice; G: Discretionary
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 25
YEAR TWO
SEMESTER THREE
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area*
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
BA223 Mathematics (3) 2 2 0 3 BA124 None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
CC216 Digital Logic Design 2 2 0 3 CC111 None 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3
CC213 Programming Application 2 2 0 3 CC112 None 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 3
LH231 Technical report writing 2 2 0 3 LH131 None 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
ME274 Material Science 2 2 2 3 None None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
EE231 Electrical Circuit (1) 2 1 1 3 BA124 None 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3
Total 12 11 3 18 Total 3 6 6 1 2 0 0 18
SEMESTER FOUR
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
BA224 Mathematics (4) 2 2 0 3 BA223 None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
EE232 Electrical Circuit (2) 2 2 0 3 EE231 None 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3
EC238 Electronics (1) 2 0 4 3 EE231 None 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3
ME234 Thermo-Fluid 2 2 0 3 BA114 None 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 3
EE211 Electrical Measurements & Inst. 2 1 1 3 EE231 None 0 0 1.5 1 0.25 0.25 0 3
NE264 Scientific Thinking 2 2 0 3 None None 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
Total 12 9 5 18 Total 3 5 8.5 1 0.25 0.25 0 18
* A: Humanities and Social Sciences; B: Mathematics and Basic Sciences; C: Basic Engineering Sciences; D: Applied Engineering and Design; E: Computer Applications and ICT; F: Projects and Practice; G: Discretionary
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 26
YEAR THREE
SEMESTER FIVE
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area*
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
BA323 Mathematics (5) 2 2 0 3 BA224 None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
EC339 Electronics (2) 2 1 1 3 EC238 None 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3
EE312 Electrical Measurements & Inst.(2) 2 2 0 3 EE211 None 0 0 1 1.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 3
EE321 Electrical Machines (1) 2 2 0 3 EE232 None 0 0 1 1.5 0.5 0 0 3
EE341 Introduction to Power Eng. 2 2 0 3 EE232 None 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 3
EE332 Network Analysis 2 2 0 3 EE232 None 0 0.5 1 1 0.5 0 0 3
Total 12 11 1 18 Total 0 3.5 7 5.75 1.25 0.25 0.25 18
SEMESTER SIX
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites
NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
BA327 Statistics & Numerical Mathematics 2 2 0 3 BA124 None 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
EE311 Fundamentals of Control Engineering 2 1 1 3 BA224 None 0 0 1 1.25 0.5 0.25 0 3
EE332 Electrical and Magnetic Fields (1) 2 2 0 3 BA224 None 0 0.5 1 1 0.5 0 0 3
EE322 Electrical Machines (2) 2 2 0 3 EE321 None 0 0 1 1.25 0.5 0.25 0 3
EE342 Power System (1) 2 2 0 3 EE341 None 0 0 1 1.25 0.5 0 0.25 3
EE421 Power Electronics (1) 2 1 1 3 EC329 None 0 0 1 1.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 3
Total 12 10 2 18 Total 0 3.5 5 6 2.25 0.75 0.5 18
* A: Humanities and Social Sciences; B: Mathematics and Basic Sciences; C: Basic Engineering Sciences; D: Applied Engineering and Design; E: Computer Applications and ICT; F: Projects and Practice; G: Discretionary
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 27
YEAR FOUR
SEMESTER SEVEN
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area*
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
CC411 Introduction to Microprocessor 2 1 1 3 CC216 None 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 3
EE333 Electrical and Magnetic Fields (2) 2 2 0 3 EE331 None 0 0.5 1 0.5 0.5 0 0.5 3
EE422 Electrical Machines (3) 2 2 0 3 EE322 None 0 0 0.75 1.25 0.5 0.25 0.25 3
EE423 Power Electronics (2) 2 2 0 3 EE421 None 0 0 0.5 1.25 0.75 0.25 0.25 3
EE411 Control Systems (1) 2 0 2 3 EE311 None 0 0.25 0.75 1 0.5 0.25 0.25 3
EE441 Power System (2) 2 2 0 3 EE342 None 0 0 0.25 1.5 0.5 0.25 0.5 3
Total 12 9 3 18 Total 0 0.75 3.25 7.5 3.75 1 1.75 18
SEMESTER EIGHT
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit
Hours
Prerequisites
NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
EE413 Microprocessor Based Process Ctrl 2 1 1 3 CC411 None 0 0 0 1 0.5 1 0.5 3
NE364 Engineering Economy 2 2 0 3 None None 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 3
EE412 Control Systems (2) 2 2 0 3 EE411 None 0 0 0.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 3
EE424 Electrical Drive (1) 2 1 1 3 EE422 None 0 0 0 1.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 3
EE442 Power Systems Protection (1) 2 2 0 3 IM423 None 0 0 0.25 1 0.5 0.75 0.5 3
ME520 Power Plant Technology 2 2 0 3 ME234 None 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3
IM400 Practical Training 0 0 0 0 None None 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 12 10 2 18 Total 1 2 3.75 4.5 2 2.75 2 18
* A: Humanities and Social Sciences; B: Mathematics and Basic Sciences; C: Basic Engineering Sciences; D: Applied Engineering and Design; E: Computer Applications and ICT; F: Projects and Practice; G: Discretionary
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 28
YEAR FIVE
SEMESTER NINE
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area*
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
EE501 Senior Project (1) 2 4 0 3 Senior Standing 0.25 0 0 0.25 0 1 1.5 3
EEXXX Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 0 0 0 1.5 0.5 1 0 3
EEXXX Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 0 0 0 1.5 0.25 1 0.25 3
EEXXX Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 0 0 0 1.25 0.5 1 0.25 3
EEXXX Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 0 0 0 1.25 0.5 1.25 0 3
NE467 Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
Total 12 14 0 18 Total 3.25 0 0 5.75 1.75 5.25 2 18
SEMESTER TEN
Code Title
Contact Hours Credit Hours
Prerequisites NARS Characterization for Engineering by
Subject Area
Total Lecture Tutorial Lab Pre (1) Pre (2) A B C D E F G
EE503 Senior Project (2) 2 4 0 6 EE501 None 0.5 0 0 1 1 1.5 2 6
EEXXX Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 0 0 0 1.5 0.25 1 0.25 3
EEXXX Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 0 0 0 1.5 0.5 1 0 3
EEXXX Department Restricted Elective 2 2 0 3 As Designated 0 0 0 1.25 0.5 1 0.25 3
IM535 Department Restricted Elective 3 0 0 3 126 Cr Hr None 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3
Total 11 10 0 18 Total 0.5 0 0 5.25 2.25 4.5 5.5 18
* A: Humanities and Social Sciences; B: Mathematics and Basic Sciences; C: Basic Engineering Sciences; D: Applied Engineering and Design; E: Computer Applications and ICT; F: Projects and Practice; G: Discretionary
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 30
Program Analysis by Semester Offering
Contact Hours per Week NARS Characterization for Engineering*
Semester Lecture Tutorial Lab Total A B C D E F G Total
1 14 8 6 28 4 11 1 0 2 0 0 18
2 13 8 6 27 2 11 2 2 1 0 0 18
3 12 11 3 26 3 6 6 1 1 0 0 17
4 12 9 5 26 3 5 8.5 1 0.25 0.25 0 18
5 12 11 1 24 0 3.5 7 5.75 1.25 0.25 0.25 18
6 12 10 2 24 0 3.5 5 6 2.25 0.75 0.5 18
7 12 9 3 24 0 0.75 3.25 7.5 3.75 1 1.75 18
8 12 10 2 24 1 2 3.75 4.5 2 2.75 2 18
9 12 14 0 26 3.25 0 0 5.75 1.75 5.25 2 18
10 10 12 0 22 0.5 0 0 5.25 2.25 4.5 5.5 18
Grand Total 120 96 44 260 16 44 41 41.5 14.5 12 11 180
Percentage 46 37 17 100 9 24 23 23 8 7 6 100
Distribution of Contact Hours by Semester (Absolute)
* A: Humanities and Social Sciences; B: Mathematics and Basic Sciences; C: Basic Engineering Sciences; D: Applied Engineering and Design; E: Computer Applications and ICT; F: Projects and Practice; G: Discretionary
14 13 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 11
88 11
911 10 9 10
14
10
66 1 5 1 2 3 2
0
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Lab
Tutorial
Lecture
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 31
Distribution of Contact Hours by Semester (Percentage)
Distribution of Total Contact Hours.
14 13 12 12 12 12 12 12 1211
8 8
11
9
11 10 9 10 1410
6 6
1
5
1 2 3 20 0
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Lab
Tutorial
Lecture
9%
24%
23%
23%
8%
7%
6%
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 32
NARS Characterization by Semester (Absolute)
NARS Characterization by Semester (Percentage)
42 3 3
0 0 0 13.25
0.5
11
116 5
3.5 3.50.75
20
0
1
2
6 8.5
75
3.25
3.75
0
0
0 2 11
5.75
6
7.54.5
5.75
5.25
0 00
0.25 0.25 0.751
2.755.25
4.5
0 00
0 0.25 0.51.75 2 2
5.5
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
42
3 3
0 0 0 13.25
0.5
11
116
5
3.5 3.50.75
20
0
1
26 8.5
75
3.25
3.75
0
0
0 2 11
5.75
6
7.54.5
5.75
5.25
2 1 1 0.251.25
2.25
3.752
1.75
2.25
0 0 0 0.25 0.25 0.75
12.75
5.25
4.5
0 0 0 0 0.25 0.51.75 2 2
5.5
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 33
Total Contact Hours Distribution
Program Analysis by Subject Field
Contact Hours per Week NARS Characterization for Engineering*
Semester Lecture Tutorial Lab Total A B C D E F G Total
BA 24 18 6 48 3 24 0 0 0 0 0 27
CC 10 5 5 20 0 0 4 5 6 0 0 15
IM 6 2 2 10 2 1 1 0 0 0 3 4
EE X0X 4 8 0 12 0.75 0 0 1.25 1 2.5 3.5 9
EE X1X 12 7 5 24 0 0.25 4.75 6.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 18
EE X2X 12 10 2 24 0 0 3.75 6.75 2.25 1.25 1 15
EE X3X 10 9 1 20 0 1 8.5 2.75 1.75 0.25 0.75 15
EE X4X 10 10 0 20 0 0.5 3.5 6.75 2 1 1.25 15
EE XXXE 14 14 0 28 0 0 0 9.75 3 7.25 1 21
LH 4 4 0 8 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 4
ME 8 8 0 20 0 6 5 0 0 0 0 11
NE 6 6 0 12 7 2 0 0 0 0 0 9
Grand Total 120 96 44 260 16 44 41 41.5 14.5 12 11 180
Percentage 46 37 17 100 9 24 23 23 8 7 6 100
* A: Humanities and Social Sciences; B: Mathematics and Basic Sciences; C: Basic Engineering Sciences; D: Applied Engineering and Design; E: Computer Applications and ICT; F: Projects and Practice; G: Discretionary
46%
37%
17%
Lecture
Tutorial
Lab
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 34
Distribution of Contact Hours by Field (Absolute)
Distribution of Contact Hours by Subject Field (Percentage)
24
106 4
12 12 10 10 144
8 6
18
5
2 8
7 109 10
14
4
86
6
5
20
5 21 0
0
0
00
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
BA CC IM EE
X0X
EE
X1X
EE
X2X
EE
X3X
EE
X4X
EE
XXXE
LH ME NE
Lab
Tutorial
Lecture
24 106
4
12 12 10 10 14 4 8 6
185
2 8 710 9 10 14 4 8 6
65 2
0
52 1 0 0 0 0 0
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
BA CC IM EE
X0X
EE
X1X
EE
X2X
EE
X3X
EE
X4X
EE
XXXE
LH ME NE
Lab
Tutorial
Lecture
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 35
Distribution of Total Contact Hours.
Nars Characterization by Subject Field (Absolute)
20%
8%
4%
5%
10%10%
8%
8%
12%
3%
7%5% BA
CC
IM
EE X0X
EE X1X
EE X2X
EE X3X
EE X4X
EE XXXE
LH
ME
NE
30
2 0.75 0 0 0 0 04
0
7
24
0
10 0.25 0 1 0.5 0
06
2
0
5
0
1.25
6.56.75
2.75
6.759.75 0
00
0
6
01
2.52.25
1.752 3
0
00
0
0
0 2.5
2.51.25 0.25 1
7.25
0
00
0
0
33.5
1.5
1 0.75 1.25
1
0
00
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
BA CC IM EE
X0X
EE
X1X
EE
X2X
EE
X3X
EE
X4X
EE
XXXE
LH ME NE
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 36
Nars Characterization by Subject Filed (Percentage)
Analysis of Electrical and Control Engineering total Credit hours by Subject Field (Percentage)
30
2
0.750 0 0 0 0
4
0
7
24
0
1
00.25 0
1 0.5 0
0
6
2
0
4
1
04.75 3.75
8.5
3.5
0
0
5
00
5
0
1.25
6.5 6.75
2.75
6.75
9.75
0 0 00
6
0
1
2.52.25
1.75
2
3
0 0 00 0
3 3.5
1.5 1 0.75 1.25 1 0 0 0
0%
20%
40%
60%
80%
100%
BA CC IM EE
X0X
EE
X1X
EE
X2X
EE
X3X
EE
X4X
EE
XXXE
LH ME NE
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
17%
9%
2%
6%
11%
9%9%
9%
13%
2%
7%
6% BA
CC
IM
EE X0X
EE X1X
EE X2X
EE X3X
EE X4X
EE XXXE
LH
ME
NE
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 37
Analysis of Electrical and Control Engineering total Credit hours (Percentage)
Analysis of Electrical and Control Engineering total Contact hours (Percentage)
BA; 17%
CC; 9%
EE; 2%
LH; 6%
ME; 11%
NE; 9%
EE X0X; 9%
EE X1X; 9%
EE X2X; 13%
EE X3X; 2%EE X4X; 7%
EE XXXE; 6%
IM; 57%
BA; 20%
CC; 8%
EE; 4%
LH; 5%
ME; 10%
NE; 10%
EE X0X; 8%
EE X1X; 8%
EE X2X; 12%
EE X3X; 3%EE X4X; 7%
EE XXXE; 5%
IM; 55%
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 38
Comparison with Previous Program
Changes to Previous Program
The previous Electrical and Control Engineering program has been modified to meet the requirements of the IEE professional institute (part of the British Professional Institutes) and more importantly to satisfy the requirements of the Supreme Council of Egyptian Universities.
The changes in the program where mainly focused on generally increasing the percentage of design and applied engineering courses, and specifically in years 3 and 4 (semesters 5 to 8).
Modification Results
The results of the modifications to the program are as follows:
Several course‟s prerequisites were modified according to department‟s requirements. These courses include:
Course Prerequisites
EE 416 CC 442
EE 418 EE328 OR EE218
EE 512 EE 411 OR EE 418
EE 515 EE 411 OR EE 418
EE 516 EE 412 OR EE 418
EE 543 EE 441
EE 545 EE 441
Course contents were modified to meet NARS specifications.
Text books were updated with newer versions.
Electrical drives laboratory AND Automation laboratory has been added to the list of the departments laboratories to familiarize students with the latest developments in the field of electrical drives and automation applied in industry
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 39
Courses Summary Description
Brief description of all courses including the number of credit hours and prerequisites.
Basic and Applied Science (BA)
BA 113 – Physics (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: None
Introduction to static electricity and Coulomb‟s law - Introduction to static electricity and coulomb‟s law - Electric field. - Electric potential. – Capacitors - Electric current, ohm‟s law resistors in series and parallel - Kirchhoff‟s rule - Introduction to theory of magnetism and different applications - Electromagnetic induction - Optics and waves (nature of light, properties of light waves) - Young‟s double slit „polarization of light waves.
BA 114 – Physics (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA113
Introduction to thermodynamics - Reversibility and reversible work - First law of thermodynamics‟ Non-flow equation - Steady flow equation - Working Fluid (steam, perfect gas) - Reversible processes.(constant volume, constant pressure, constant temperature, adiabatic) - Reversible process ( polytropic) - Second law of thermodynamics - Heat transfer.
BA 118 - Chemistry
Cr.2. Prerequisite: None
Electrochemical reactions and cells, volumetric analysis (practical) - Principles of corrosion, titrate technique, determinate of acidity (practical) - Metals and corrosive environments, determinate of alkalinity and chloride (practical) - Forms of corrosion uniform, galvanic and differential aeration cell, determination of hardness (practical) - Pitting, stress corrosion cracking and intergranular corrosion forms, determination of dissolved oxygen (practical) - Atmospheric and erosion corrosion, spectrophotometer analysis (practical) - Coating and inhibitors as protection methods, determination of nitrite and nitrate (practical) - Cathodic protection, determination of phosphate and silica (practical) - Classification of fuel, properties of liquid fuel, determination of some heavy metals (practical) - Combustion of fuel, determination of fluorine and chlorine (practical) - air supply and exhaust gases, determination of turbidity (practical) - Classification of lubricants advantages and disadvantages of different types, oil analysis determination of viscosity and T.B.N (practical) - Properties of lubricants and additives, determination of insoluble and saltwater (practical) - Nature of impurities in water, soft and hard water effect of using impure water on
Chapter
3
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 40
boilers performance, determination of acidity and water content (practical) - Water treatment, determination of ph (practical) - Air and water pollution, determination of TDS and salinity(practical).
BA 123 – Mathematics (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: None
Basic techniques and rules of differentiation - Trigonometric function: properties, basic identities and their derivatives - Inverse of trigonometric and their derivatives - Logarithmic functions: their properties, basic identities and derivatives - Exponential functions: their properties, basic identities and derivatives - Derivative of hyperbolic functions and their inverse - Parametric differentiation and implicit differentiation - The Nth derivative - L‟ Hopital rule - Partial differentiation - Maclaurin‟s expansion. - Physical application - Curve sketching - Conic sections - General revision.
BA 124 – Mathematics (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA123
Definition of indefinite integrals and table of famous integrals - Simple rules of integration and the fundamental theorem of calculus - Fundamental theorem of calculus and integration by parts - Integration by parts and integration of rational functions - Integration of rational functions - Integration of trigonometric powers - Trigonometric substitution and 7th week exam - Integration of quadratic forms and the reduction formulas - Definite integration - Area and volume - Area, volume and length of curve - Average of a function, numerical integration - Matrix Algebra - Solution of systems of linear equations.
BA 141 – Engineering Mechanics (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: None
Rectangular components of a force - Parallelogram law - Equilibrium of particle – springs and cables - Moment of force - Free body diagram - Equilibrium of rigid body - Trusses “joint method – zero – force members” - Trusses “method of section” – Frames – Friction - Mass Moment of Inertia - Virtual work.
BA 142 – Engineering Mechanics (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA141
Kinematics of a particle – Rectilinear Kinematics - Curvilinear Motion –Projectile Motion - Force & Acceleration (Kinetics) - Work & Energy of a particle (Kinetics) - Rotation of a Rigid Body about a fixed Axis - General Plan Motion - Relative Motion (Velocity) - Relative Motion (Acceleration) - Planar Kinetics of Rigid Body – Equation of Translation Motion - Equation of Rotational Motion - Equation of General Plane Motion - Work and Energy.
BA 223 – Mathematics (3)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA124
Solving first order differential equations: Separable of variables and Homogeneous equation - Solving first order differential equations: Exact and Linear equations - Solving first order differential equations: Bernoulli's equation and revision on first order differential equations - Solving second order homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients, method of undetermined coefficients - Solving second order non-homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients, method of variation of parameters - Continue method of variation of parameters,
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 41
solving second order differential equations with variable coefficients (Euler's equation), Laplace transform: Basic definition, First shifting theorem, Laplace transform: Transform differentiation and integration, Unit step function, second shifting theorem, and convolution theorem - Inverse Laplace transforms - Solving differential equations by using Laplace transform - Fourier series: Fourier series for functions of period 2P - Fourier series for even and odd functions - Fourier series for harmonic functions.
BA 224 – Mathematics (4)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA223
Vector Algebra / Dot and cross product and Applications - Partial Differentiation / and Derivatives of vector functions - Gradient / Divergence/ curl/ Laplacian - Line Integrals / line Integrals Independent of the path / Exactness - Conservative vector fields - Double Integrals in Cartesian and polar coordinates / Green‟s Theorem - Surface Integrals / Stokes‟ Theorem - Triple Integrals / Divergence (Gauss‟ Theorem) - Review on Integrals Theorems - Complex numbers and functions / forms of representation - Analytic functions/ Harmonic functions - Line complex integrals / Cauchy‟s Integrals Theorem - Zeros and poles of Analytic functions/ Residues and their evaluation - Residue Theorem / Application to Real Integral - Introduction to Fourier Integrals and Transforms.
BA 327 – Probability and Numerical Methods
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA124
Probability / Statistics – Probability : Events , Sample Spaces and Probability , conditional Probability , Independent Events , Bay‟s theorem ; Discrete Probability Distribution; Continuous Probability Distribution ; Special Distributions – Numerical Methods/ Roots of Equations : Bracketing Methods (The Bisection and The False – Position Methods ) , Open Methods ( Simple Fixed Point Iteration ; The Newton-Raphson Method ; The Secant Method) , Curve Fitting : Interpolation (Newton‟s Divided-Difference Interpolating polynomials; Lagrange Interpolating Polynomials; Inverse Interpolation).
Computer Engineering (CC)
CC 111 – Introduction to Computers
Cr.3. Prerequisite: None
Introduction to the World of Computers Input and Output - The System Unit: Processing and Memory - Storage and Input/Output Devices - System Software and Application Software - Program Development, Programming Languages, and Flow charts - Visual Basic 1 - Visual Basic 2 - Visual Basic 3 - Web page design using HTML 1 - Web page design using HTML 2 - Communications and Networks 1 - Communications and Networks 2 - Ethics, Computer Crime, Privacy, and other Social Issues.
CC 112 – Structured Programming
Cr.3. Prerequisite: CC 111
Overview of Programming and Problem Solving - C Syntax and Semantics - I/O Formatting and Arithmetic - Conditions and Logical Expressions - Selection Control Structures - Repetitions (Part 1) - Repetitions (Part 2) - Functions (Part 1) - Functions (Part 2) - Arrays (Part 1) - Arrays (Part 2) -
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 42
Programming applications – problem solving Tech ( Part 1) - Programming applications – problem solving Tech( Part 2).
CC 213 – Programming Applications
Cr.3. Prerequisite: CC 112
Revision of structured programming constructs: selection, repetition, and Functions - Revision of one dimensional array - Searching and sorting - Two dimensional arrays – Pointers – Strings – Structures – Unions – Recursion - Text Files - Binary Files - Bitwise Operators/ I/O Interfacing - Advanced Applications.
CC 216 – Digital Logic Design
Cr.3. Prerequisite: CC 111
Number systems - binary arithmetic and codes - logic gates - Boolean algebra and logic simplifications - Design and realization of combinational circuits - Functions of combinational circuits logic - Flip-Flops - analysis design and realization of counters - analysis and realization of shift registers - Computer aided engineering.
CC 411 – Introduction to Microprocessors
Cr.3. Prerequisite: CC 312 or EC 311
Microprocessors and microcomputers– Microcomputer structure: microprocessor, memory, busses (synchronous and asynchronous) and I/O)– 16/32-bit microprocessor architecture: Instruction cycle, microinstructions – micro-programming, instruction decoding – Reduced Instruction Set computer (RISC) architecture – Complex Instruction Set computer (CISC) architecture– Memory (RAM, ROM, memory mapping of I/O – 1/O (parallel and serial I/O interfaces, system clock, clock phases and bit rates)– Interrupts (types, handling of interrupts) – Software aids (text editors and assemblers, linkers and macro-assemblers).
Electronics Engineering (EC)
EC 238– Electronics (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: None
Semiconductors - p-n junction - diode current components - junction capacitance - junction diode as a circuit element - special p-n junctions - bipolar junction transistor and field effect transistor: structure- operation – I-V characteristics - large and small analysis.
EC 339– Electronics (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EC 238
Electronic amplifier theory- power amplifiers- Differential amplifiers- Operational amplifiers filters and Oscillators.
Electrical Engineering (EE)
EE 211 – Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 231
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 43
Accuracy of measurement and error analysis – Absolute and secondary instruments and indicating instrument – Moving coil and moving iron instruments – Dynamometer type instruments– Induction type instruments– Wattmeter of Measuring of power and power factor – Bridges (DC) – Bridges (AC)– Current and potential transformers – Oscilloscopes.
EE 218 – Instrumentation and Measurements
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE231
Introduction to feedback control (1) - Introduction to feedback control (2)- Physical Measurements - Introduction to feedback systems - Liquid level instruments - Liquid flow instruments – PH + Viscosity - Displacement + velocity measurements - Force and torque measurements - Data analysis - Error detectors/comparators - Electric/pneumatic transducers - Amplifier – Actuation.
EE 311 – Fundamentals of Control Engineering
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA 224
General revision of Laplace transforms, test input signals– Open loop systems and closed loop systems– Transfer function and basic system properties– Block diagram reduction techniques– Signal flow graph reduction techniques– Time response of 1st and 2nd order systems– Modeling of some physical, electrical, mechanical and thermal systems– Sensitivity of feedback control systems–Error analysis, system types and error constants– Concept of stability analysis, Routh-Hurwitz, relative stability – Concept and effect of poles and zeros– Analysis & simple electromechanical systems – Proportional Integral Derivative controller– System response to P, PI and PID–Controller tuning technique (Open loop –Closed loop).
EE 312 – Electrical Measurements & Instrumentation (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 211
Displacement, velocity , pressure , temperature sensors– Level , flow torque and other sensors– Signal conditioning– Data acquisition and conversion– Fundamentals of digital voltmeters– Digital voltmeters– Digital multimeters– Accuracy of digital voltmeters.
EE 411– Control Systems (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 311
Mathematical modeling of physical systems– Frequency response analysis– Polar plots–Bode diagrams– More topics on Bode diagrams– Concept of stability in control systems– Routh‟s stability criterion– Nyquist stability criterion– Application of Nyquist stability criterion on Bode plots– Root locus method– More topics on root locus– Types of compensators in control systems– Lead compensation in root locus– Lead compensation in frequency domain– Feed forward control– Lag compensation in frequency domain– PID compensation.
EE 412 – Control Systems (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 411
Introducing the topic and stating the definitions of new terminology– State model of linear systems using physical variables– State - space representation using phase variables– State - space representation using canonical variables– Properties of transition matrix and solution of state equation– Poles - zeros, eigen values and stability in multivariable system– Introduction to pole placement in state feedback in state feed back design– Introduction to pole - placement in state feedback design– Introduction to nonlinear control systems– Nonlinear systems theory and
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 44
common non-linearities– Describing function method– Nature and stability of limit cycle– The phase- plane method.
EE 413 – Microprocessor Based Control
Cr.3. Prerequisite: IM 221
Types of Process Control Strategy- Type of Signal and Signal Conditioning- Analogue and digital Signal Conditioning - Discrete State Process Control- A/D and D/A Conversion- Data Acquisition Systems- Microprocessor and Microcontroller as digital control- Microcontroller Programming- Special Instructions of Microcontrollers- Applications.
EE 416 – Microcontroller Applications
Cr.3. Prerequisite: CC 442
Introduction to Microcontrollers and Architectures with a review of various types available in the market - C-language programming overview - AVR Microcontroller basic structure - AVR Microcontroller basic programming principles - Timers and Counters, PWM – Analogue interfacing of AVR Microcontrollers - Serial interfacing standards using RS-232 principles of the PC - Serial Interfacing of the AVR Microcontroller.
EE 418 – Automatic Control Systems
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 218
Introduction to open loop and closed loop control systems– Control system classification– Block diagram– System transfer function and signal flow graph– Standard input signal– Time domain specifications– Modeling of some physical systems– Time response of first and second order systems– Importance of feedback, sensitivity to parameter variations– System stability and effect of disturbance– Error analysis and error constants– Root locus techniques– Frequency domain analysis (Nyquist- Bode) Analog controllers– Controller tuning.
EE 419 – Modern control Engineering
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 418
General revision for root locus and frequency response– Lead compensator design by root locus method – Lag compensator design by root locus method – Lag lead compensator design by root locus method – Lead compensator design by frequency response technique– Lag compensator design by frequency response technique – Introduction to state space representation – Methods of writing state equation – Solution of the state equation– Controllability and observability – State variable feedback – Introduction to digital control systems – The z- transform– Block diagram representation digital systems – Time response of digital systems –Stability analysis for digital systems.
EE 511 – Discrete Control Systems
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 412
Z-transform and its properties– Pulse transfer function– Linear difference equation– Signal analysis and dynamic response– Analysis of sampled data systems– Block diagram and closed loop transfer function of discrete data systems– Stability analysis of discrete data systems– Root locus in the z-plane– Frequency response method– Design of discrete data systems using compensating networks– State-space description and solution.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 45
EE 512 – Automated Industrial Systems (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 411
Automation hierarchical levels and components– Detecting sensors and actuating elements, relay logic and their applications– Introduction to PLC.S– Types of PLCs and construction – Hardware configuration and descriptions– Programming and testing basic functions– Programming and testing advanced functions– Industrial Applications using PLCs.
EE 513 – Control Applications in Power Engineering
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 412
Control problems in electrical power system– An introduction to Modeling of turbines and synchronous machine using state space approach– Linearized simulation on model in the s-domain of one machine connected to infinite-bus system– Dynamic performing of the controlled one machine / infinite - bus system Excitation control problem : definition and control configuration of classical and modern systems– Transfer function model excitation system Excitation system compensation (power system stabilizer) Effect excitation system on generator steady – state stability limit and dynamic stabilization– Generation control problem: definition and element modeling– Power factor-control of isolated system using PID controller– Power factor-control of two area system.
EE 514 – Robotics
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 412 & CC 411
What is a robot's components – Classification and Applications Kinematics for manipulators, joints, links and gripper– Coordinate frames and transformation– Determination of coordinate frames –Orientation of end-effector – Inverse solution to Kinematics equations – Calculation of inverse transformation between coordinates – An inverse solution – Kinematic solution – Generalized velocity and torque relations– Velocity and acceleration in fixed and rotating coordinates – Jacobean matrix /rotational and transnational acceleration Dynamic models of manipulators – State variable representation for robot dynamic models – Motion control and controller design for gross & fine motion of robot manipulators – Design specifications based on second-order linear system – Controller design (using optimum control) for robot manipulators and discussion survey on sensors and actuators.
EE 515 – Computer Control of Dynamics Systems
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE411 OR EE418
Review state-space description of discrete time systems – Solution of discrete time state equations– Derivation of transfer function from state-space model– Controllability and observability of discrete time systems– Realization theory– Minimal representation digital redesign of continuous time controllers– Digital implementation of the PID controller– Pole assignment of discrete systems– Implementation of state observers for the use with state feedback control.
EE 516 – Modern Control Systems
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 412
Further state-space analysis: Linear systems with multiple eign values – Non linear state-space representation – Linearization – Jacobian matrices – Decomposition of system into controllable and uncontrollable parts – Deadbeat response-pole assignment with state and with output feedback – Use of observer – Introduction to advanced control topics: optimal control – Adaptive control
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 46
systems – System identification of dynamic systems– least squares– Theory and implementation for system estimation.
EE 517 – Optimal and Adaptive Control
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 412
Review of modern approach of control system – Calculus of extremes and single stage decision Constrained extremes and lag range multipliers – Variational calculus and Euler-Lagrange Eq– Mathematical Modeling of optimization problem – The maximum principle – The Hamiltonian – Jacobi theory – Linear regulator problems – Minimum time problem – The discrete maximum principle – Discrete linear quadratic problem – Adaptive control systems – Model reference adaptive control – Self-tuning adaptive control systems– Stability – problem in adaptive control systems.
EE 518 – Automated Industrial Systems (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 512
Building blocks of automation – Automatic production and assembly – Additional topics regarding programmable logic controllers (PLC‟s) – Analog signals processing – Integral blocks– Communications capabilities: Data interchange – Local Area Network (LAN) – Communication protocols – Different communications– Industrial application examples.
EE 321– Electrical Machines (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 232
Definition of the magnetic terms, magnetic materials and the B-H curve– Magnetic circuits principles– Electromechanical Energy Conversion Principles– Force and torque equations in magnetic circuits– Construction of a DC machine– EMF and torque equations in dc machines– Armature windings and commutator design– Armature reaction and compensation techniques– Self excitation of dc generators– External characteristics of dc generators– Kinds of losses and efficiency of dc machine– Torque and speed characteristics of dc motor– Speed control of dc motor– Starting of dc motors– DC Motor electrical braking technique.
EE 322 – Electrical Machines (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 321
Single phase transformer, Construction , principle of operation – No load conditions, leakage reactance and equivalent circuit, voltage regulation, losses and efficiency, impedance– Auto transformer– Principle of three phase machines, Construction of 3-phase stator, and general layout of three phase two pole full and short pitched winding, distribution and pitch factor– MMF of one-phase and three-phase windings– Synchronous and rotor speed theory of action of three phase induction motor– Three phase induction motors power flow, EMF and equivalent circuit– Torque speed characteristics and starting– Effect of slip and stator voltage on the performance.
EE 326 – Electrical Engineering (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 236
Moving coil instruments – Moving iron instruments – Dynamometer type instruments – Induction type instruments – Wattmeters and methods of measuring power , power factor – DC machines (Generator / motor) – Transformers – Induction motors - Synchronous machines (generator / motor) – Special type motors – Introduction to Control Systems – Open loop and closed loop
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 47
system characteristics – Control system components – transient performance of control systems – Proportional integral and derivative control and tuning.
EE 328 – Electrical Power and Machines
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 232 or EE 238
Magnetic circuits and their basic relations– Core loss and transformer basic– Transformer model and voltage regulation– Transformer rating and testing– The law of motor and generator action – construction of dc machines– DC motors characteristics and applications– DC generators characteristics and applications – AC rotating fields and theory of 3-phase induction machines– Circuit model and variable speed drives – Synchronous motors and generators– Single-phase and small motors –The electric power system and energy sources– Pollution problems and plant distribution systems– Switches and circuit breakers – system voltage and motors– System protection and power factor correction
EE 329 – Electrical Machines
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 238
DC Generators principles and construction– Armature reaction and generation in parallel– DC Motors Principles and construction– Alternators principles and construction– Synchronous motor principles and method of starting– Transformer principles and construction– 3- phase induction motor– General revision.
EE 421 – Power Electronics (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE232 & EC 238
Power electronic and characteristics, basic of power electronics, thyristors gating circuits, commutation techniques– Single phase and three phase converters (controlled and uncontrolled).
EE 422 – Electrical Machines (3)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 322
Principle of synchronous machines, construction and emf-equivalent circuit – phasor diagram for motor generator– power equation– electrical load diagram and V- curves– parallel operation starting and synchronization– voltage regulation– effect of saliency– three phase transformer– polarity and standard terminal marking inrush current transformer– three phase connections– open –delta connection– three windings transformer-tap changer and phase conversion (3 phase/2phase and 3phase/6phase)– parallel operation– current transformer.
EE 423 – Power Electronics (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 421
MOSFET Power Transistor– Chopper principles and classification– the buck and the boost regulator– the buck and the cuk regulator– single phase AC voltage controllers principles– three phase full wave AC voltage controllers– Three phase full wave AC voltage controllers– Cycloconverters– principles and performance of PWM inverters– three phase inverters, other kinds of inverters, applications.
EE 424 – Electrical Drives (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 422 & EE 423
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 48
DC Drives: single phase separately excited dc motors drives– three phase drive– dual converter– reversible drives– armature current reversal– field current reversal– closed-load/control– chopper drives– principles of: power control– regenerative brake control rheostat brake control– two/four quadrant chopper drives and multiphase choppers. AC drives: induction motor drive– stator voltage and frequency control– current control– voltage, current and frequency control– closed-loop control– synchronous motor drive with closed-loop control.
EE 521 – Special Electrical Machines
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 422
Two phase induction motor – Single phase induction motor – Starting of single phase induction motor – Single phase commutator series motor – Energy convention in doubly salient machines – Three phase conventional reluctance machines – Salient pole– synchronous reluctance machine – Stepper motor operation principles – Permanent magnet stepper motor– Variable reluctance stepper motors– Switched reluctance motors– Linear induction motors– Induction generators– Permanent magnet DC motor– Brushless DC motors.
EE 522 – Electrical Drives (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE421 &EE422
Elements of electric drive systems– Matching between motor and loads characteristics– Concept of traveling time and drive dynamics– Drive control techniques– Drive applications– Introduction to matrix analysis of electric machine– D-Q modeling of electric machines– Speed control of DC motors based on D-Q model– Vector control of 3 phase induction motor– Speed control of variable reluctance motor based on generalized torque matrix representation– Introduction to design of electric machines– Material selection and factors affecting the machine design– Design of single phase transformer– Design of three phase transformer– Design of DC machines.
EE 231 – Electrical Circuits (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA 124
Basic d-c circuit elements , series and parallel network –Ohm‟s law and 1st & 2nd kirchoff‟s laws –Nodal analysis –Mesh analysis – Basic network theorems “ source transformation , super position , Thevenin‟s theorem and Norton‟s theorem, max. power transfer” – Alternating current fundamentals and a-c generation – R.M.S value and average value, form factor and crest factor– Phasor concept – Relation between current and voltage in resistors , capacitors and inductor, Response of R-L and R-C circuits – Sinusoidal response of series R.L.C circuit – Series resonance.
EE 232 – Electrical Circuits (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 231
AC series circuit and series response revision, parallel circuit and to Y-simplification– Source transformation, superposition the node voltage method and the mesh current method– Thevenin theorem– Complex power and maximum power calculations– Three phase voltage sources–
Analysis of the balanced Y-Y circuit– Analysis of the Y- & -Y circuit and - a circuit– Complex power calculation in three phase– Unbalanced and four wire three phase loads– Unbalanced Y loads with neutral (wire disconnected) or having Zo– Inductances and capacitors, series-parallel combinations– The natural response for R-L circuit– The natural response of R-C circuit– General solution of step response of R-L and R-C circuit– Sequential switching.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 49
EE 236 – Electrical Engineering (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA 124
Basic circuit: Current, Voltage, Ohm‟s law – Kirchoff‟s current and voltage laws – Resistance in series or parallel - Mesh analysis – Nodal analysis– Electromagnetism ; laws of magnetic force, field strength, flux density, magnetic induction– Relation between B,H,I and K, force on a conductor lying in magnetic field– Alternating current: waves– effective– and mean values– phasor representation– voltage– current and impedance as complex numbers– phasor analysis– instantaneous and complex power– RL & RC circuits– RLC circuits– analysis of A-C networks– power analysis (active, reactive, apparent, power factor)– Resonance– Polyphase circuits: three-
phase generation, Y-Y, Y-, -Y and - three phase circuit analysis.
EE 238 – Electrical Engineering Fundamentals
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA 124
Introduction– Basic d-c circuit– Resistance, voltage, current, and ohm‟s law, Kirchhoff‟s laws– Resistances in series or parallel– Mesh analysis– Nodal analysis– Source transformation– Superposition, voltage and current divider– Laws of magnetic force– Field strength, flux density– Relation between B,H,I,K– Alternating current generation – Waves, effective value and mean value– Phasor representation– Voltage, current and impedance as complex numbers– Phasor analysis– Instantaneous and complex power.
EE 331 – Electric & Magnetic Fields (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA 223
Vector analysis and coordinate systems– Coulomb‟s law and Electric field intensity– Electric flux density , Gauss‟s law and Divergence theorem –Energy and potential (Electrostatics)–Conductors, Dielectric , and capacitance– Poisson‟s and la place‟s equations.
EE 332– Network Analysis
Cr.3. Prerequisite: BA224 & EE232
Introducing the topic and illustrating its importance for Elec. Eng– Complex frequency method for different input forms– Laplace transform and relation between current and voltage for resistance, capacitance and inductance– Laplace transform and electric circuit sources– The impulse function in circuit analysis– Laplace transform and the concept of transfer function– The concept of magnetic coupling– Analysis of magnetic coupled circuits– Linear transformers– Ideal transformers– Two-port networks and it‟s different equation forms– Evaluation of its parameter– Analysis of terminated two-port circuits– Interconnected two-port networks– Revision and a set of solved examples.
EE 333 – Electric & Magnetic Fields (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 331
The steady magnetic field– Analogy between steady magnetic field and Electro static field– Magnetic forces– Magnetic Materials and Inductance– Time varying fields– Maxwell‟s four equations– The uniform plane wave.
EE 341 – Introduction to Power Engineering
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE232
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 50
Elements of power system– Operating voltage choice– Parameters of overhead trans. lines (R, L&C)– Representation of O.H.T.L. (Short T.L.)– Representation of O.H.T.L. (Medium T.L.)– Representation of O.H.T.L. (Long T.L.)– Voltage regulation– Corona phenomenon and its calculations– Mechanical design (Sag calculations, at the same level) – Mechanical design (Sag calculations at different levels) – Mechanical design (Insulators), types of poles & towers– Underground cables (Construction, types)– Underground cables (Electric field & insulation measurements).
EE 342 – Power Systems (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 341
Single line diagram of power system– The per unit system– Bus admittance matrix– Bus impedance matrix– Power flow equations– Gauss- Seidel power flow solution– Newton Raphson power flow solution– Synchronous generator for power control– Tap changing transformers– Non linear function optimization– Economic dispatch neglecting losses and no generator limits– Economic dispatch neglecting losses and including generator limits– Economic dispatch including losses.
EE 441– Power Systems (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 342
Transients in R-L Series Circuits– Internal voltage of loaded machines under faults conditions– Fault calculation using Z bus– The selection of circuit breakers– The symmetrical components of
unbalanced phasors– Power in terms of symmetrical components– Sequence circuits of & impedance– Unsymmetrical faults on power systems and single line to ground faults– Line to line faults and double line to ground faults– The stability problem– Rotor dynamics and swing equation– The power equation and synchronizing power coefficients– Equal-area criterion of stability– Step-by-step solution of the swing curve– Factors affecting transient stability.
EE 442 – Power Systems Protection (1)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 441
General principles of protection– Types of relays and construction of over current relays– Instrument transformers – Fuses and Circuit breakers – Over-current relay settings – Directional relays– Protection of lines and distance protection Differential protection– Protection of transformers– Protection of motors– Protection of generators.
EE 448 – Electrical Power
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 329
Elements of Power Systems– Comparison of different transmission Systems– D.C. Distribution– A.C. Distribution– Mechanical Design of O.H.T.L– Resistance and inductance of O.H.T.L– Capacitance of O.H.T.L– Representation of O.H.T.L– Underground cables– Symmetrical faults– Power System protection Concepts– Protection of feeders, motors.
EE 449 – Electrical Power in Ships
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 329
Elements of power system– DC single and two wire distributors with concentrated loads– Uniformly loaded distributors– D.C. three wire distributor– D.C ring distributor– A.C radial distributor– A.C. ring distributor– Per- unit system– Symmetrical faults– Introduction to protection
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 51
system– Fuses, circuit breakers kinds and characteristics– Current transformers– Relay kinds, characteristic and settings– Protection of synchronous generators– Protection of induction motors
EE 541 – Power System Protection (2)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 442
Static/ digital versus electromechanical relays– Relaying practices– Components, detectors and applications– Hardware of digital relay– Mathematical background for digital protection– Digital O.C. relay– Digital distance relay– Digital protection of rotating machines– Digital protection of transformers– Digital bus bar protection– Integration of protection and control in substations– Traveling wave based protection– Recent topics in digital protection.
EE 542 – Electrical Power Stations
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 441
Introduction to power stations– Loads and load curves– Power plant economies – Tariffs and power factor improvements– Selection of plants– Types of power stations: Gas turbines, thermal, hydro, steam and nuclear power stations– Hydrothermal coordination– Parallel operation of alternators– Major electrical equipments in power plants– System interconnections– New energy sources.
EE 543 – Electrical Power Distribution
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 441
Distribution systems: Distribution substation service areas –distribution configurations primaries design –secondaries design– Voltage profiles and regulators– O.H.T.L. and equipment –types of power transformers –types of regulators– Underground distribution lines and switchgear: design of distribution Substation –design of service area– Underground distribution lines and switchgear –Capacitors and reactive power compensation –P.F. definitions – methods of improving P.F. –sizing and locating of P.F. VARS– Motor control centers– Distribution substation operation.
EE 544 – Power Systems (3)
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 441
The concept of reliability– Components reliability-reliable and non-reliable systems– State-space method and system reliability calculations– Load forecasting and load classifications– New approach used in load forecasting– Economic dispatch of thermal units– Methods of solution of dispatching problem– Unit commitment problem– SCADA systems– Harmonics and its disadvantages– Design of harmonics filters– Distributing loads– Neural networks definition– Types of neural networks– Applications of neural networks on power systems.
EE 545 – High Voltage Engineering
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 441
Generation of D. C. high voltage– Generation of A. C. high voltage– Generation of impulse voltage and currents– Measurements of high voltages– Sources of transient in power system– Travelling waves– Lattice diagram– Gaseous, liquid and solid Insulations study– Surge arresters– High voltage circuit breakers– Gas insulated switcher (GIS)– Insulation coordination– Testing and HVDC studies.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 52
EE 546 – Electrical Engineering Materials
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 333
Electric materials classification– Dielectrics Macroscopic & Microscopic approaches– Types of polarization – frequency response – complex permitivity– Dielectric losses and their measurements– Dielectric Breakdown (1)– Dielectric Breakdown (2)– Dielectric Breakdown (3)– Applications of Dielectrics– Magnetic materials: Macroscopic & Microscopic approaches– Hysterisis – Applications– Superconductivity and superconductors– Polymers and their characteristics– Ceramics and their characteristics– Optical fibers and their properties– Corrosion and cathodic protection of metals.
EE 547 – Utilization of Electrical Engineering
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 442
Illumination; properties of light, quantities and units, inverse sq. Law and cosine law– Types of lamps and their characteristics– Road lighting– Elec. Heating and welding methods– Dielectric heating, induction heating, arc induction & resistance furnaces– Direct Energy Conversion – Traction, lifts– UPS Standby power systems– Batteries– fuel cells– solar cells– Elec. safety engineering.
EE 548 – Design of Electrical & Electromechanical Systems for Commercial and Industrial Installations
Cr.3. Prerequisite: EE 442
Determination of loads & Load Characteristics– Design of Industrial and Commercial Distribution Systems– Factors affecting selection of circuit arrangements– Systems– Equipment and Facilities required to satisfy functional requirements– System protection Equipment and coordination – Wiring systems : Cables and bus ways– Controllers and motor control centers – Power factor and p.f. improvement. Emergency and standby power systems – Effects of special loads– on supply voltage– Electric – Arc furnaces– converters– motors – Lighting– Heating and Air-conditioning– Lifts and escalators– Grounding– Electrical safety : Fire alarm systems– Codes and Standards– Energy management.
EE 501 + EE 503 – Project (1) + Project (2)
Cr.3+Cr.6. Prerequisite: Completion of 138 Credit Hours and a GPA of at least 2.00.
The final year project extends over two semesters– Topics will depend on student‟s and supervisor‟s interest– They flay include data acquisition and interpretation– Computer models and simulation or design and experimentation– Students are required to give a seminar to discuss the project results and submit a final report.
Industrial and Management Engineering (IM)
IM 111 – Industrial Relations
Cr.2. Prerequisite: None
Types of industries and production techniques – Management and organization structure –Production planning and control – Industrial cost estimation techniques – Industrial economy and breakeven analysis – Accidents at work – rules and regulations – Hazards classification, prevention, and personal safety – Fire hazards identification and prevention – Chemical hazards and prevention – accident reporting – Quality control and labour relations – Science, engineering, and technology – Industrial revolutions.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 53
IM 112 – Manufacturing Technology
Cr.2. Prerequisite: None
Production of steel and cast iron – Forming operations – Heat treatment operations – Cutting tools – Mechanics of metal cutting and turning operations – Cutting fluids – Sand casting – Centrifugal casting, die casting and aspects of the casting process – Gas and Electric arc welding – Electric resistance and pressure welding and aspects of the welding process – Standards of measurements – Measuring Instruments – Measuring methods.
IM 400 – Practical Training
Cr.0. Prerequisite: None.
This course is a non-credit course and is a college graduation requirement. Students are asked to undertake a minimum of four weeks of practical training in off-campus sites recommended by the college and the department in order to pass this course. Students are required to submit a recognition letter from the site where they received their training; in addition, a report and a presentation are submitted. Course is a Pass/Fail course.
IM 423 – Operations Research
Cr.3. Prerequisite: 90 Credit Hours.
Introduction to linear programming – Development of linear programming models – The graphical and simplex method – Transportation and assignment methods – Network models and analysis (minimal spanning tree, shortest route, and maximal flow) – Critical path method – Probabilistic approach, project evaluation and review technique (PERT) – Project crashing.
IM 535 – International Operations Management
Cr.3. Prerequisite: 126 Credit Hours.
International business environment – Cultural and legal environment – Political environment – Economic environment facing business – International trade theories – Governmental influence on trade – Regional economic integration – Factor mobility and foreign direct investment – The foreign exchange market – The determination of exchange rates – Global manufacturing and supply chain management.
Language, Humanities and Social Science (LH)
LH 131 - ESP I
Cr.2. Prerequisite: None
Orientation - Personal Computing - Portable Computers - The process of academic writing - An overview of paragraph writing - Suffixes - Programming and Languages - Graded workshop - Unity and Coherence - Writing workshop - Computer Software - Computer Networks - Graded workshop - Computer Viruses- Computers in the Office.
LH 132 - ESP II
Cr.2. Prerequisite: LH 131
Orientation - Computers in Education - Paragraph writing (Concrete Support I) - Computers in Medicine - Essay writing (Analysis) - Graded workshop - Robotics - Summary writing - Virtual
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 54
Reality - Machine Translation - Graded workshop - CVs & letters of application - Interviewing skills - Multimedia.
LH 231 - ESP III
Cr.3. Prerequisite: LH 131, LH 132
Orientation - Overview of technical report writing - Background reports - Process reports - Instructions and manuals - Primary research reports - Feasibility reports - Report format - Dictionary skills - Paraphrasing - Summarizing - Further practice on summarizing and paraphrasing - Discussion of report outlines - Presentation skills (CD viewing I) - Quotations and source documentation - Report writing workshop - Use of visual aids in technical writing - Presentation skills (CD viewing II) - Report writing workshop - Mini presentations - Report writing workshop - Rehearsals - End of term presentations.
Mechanical Engineering (ME)
ME 151 - Engineering Drawings & Projection
CR: 2. Prerequisite: None
Drawing practices and techniques (Exercises on geometrical construction) - Methods of object projection (Exercises on geometrical construction – Exercises on object projection) - Orthogonal projection (Exercises on orthogonal projection) - Missing views, dimensioning and free hand sketching (Exercises on projection and free hand sketching) - Sectioning and conventions (Exercises on sectional views) - Intersection of geometrical surfaces and development (Exercises in intersection of geometrical surfaces and development) - Standard metal sections and metal structures (Exercises on metal structures) - Compound metal sections and welds (Exercises on metal structures) - Isometric projection & Surface intersections (Exercises on Isometry and surface intersections) - Perspective projection (Exercises on Perspective projection) - Computer Aided drafting using AutoCAD (General Introduction) - Drawing and editing commands in AutoCAD - Writing texts, Dimensioning and viewing commands.
ME 234 - Thermo-fluids
CR: 3. Prerequisite: BA 114
Heat Engine Cycle-Steam Cycles-Positive Displacement Machine-Gas Turbine- Fluid Properties-Manometers-Hydrostatic Forces-Flow Characteristics-Continuity Equation-Bernoulli's Equation.
ME 274 - Materials Science
CR: 3. Prerequisite: BA 114 and BA 142
Classification of Engineering Materials – General Introduction - Atomic Bonding in Solids - The Crystalline Structure of Materials - Properties, Testing, and Inspection of Engineering Materials - Introduction to Thermal Equilibrium Diagrams -Non-Destructive Testing - Heat Treatment of Metals -Corrosion: An Introduction.
ME 425 – Power plant technology
CR: 3. Prerequisite: ME 234 or ME 333
Thermodynamics Review (1st , 2nd laws of thermodynamics) - Steam Formation - Steam Properties and Process - Simple Rankine Cycle – Modified Rankine Cycle –Reheat and Regeneration Cycle – Steam Turbine, Steam Generator and Steam Condenser – Power Plant
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 55
Control – Simple Gas Turbine Cycle – Gas Turbine Cycle with Reheat, Intercooling and Regeneration – Combined Cycle Power Plant – Nuclear Power Plant – Renewable Power Generation, Solar Energy – Wind Energy – Geothermal Energy.
Non-Engineering (NE)
NE 264 – Scientific Thinking
Cr.3. Prerequisite: None
Thinking Patterns Development - Nature and postulates of scientific thinking - Meaning and objective of Science - Scientific values and directions - Science, non-science and other-than science - Engineering and Technology - Properties of science - Mental operations used in science and Scientific Guessing - Types of deductions and Representation - Research methods in natural sciences: definitions, Experiments, Observations, Scientific postulates and their conditions - Verification of scientific postulates - General methods of problems solving - Creative and critical Thinking - Fluency types – Flexibility - Originality and Basics of Brain Storming.
NE 364 – Engineering Economy
Cr.3.Prerequisite: 54 Credit Hours.
Introduction and overview – Cost concepts and the economic environment – Principles of money, time relations – Concept of economic equivalence – Cash flow diagrams interest formulas and uniform series – Cash flow diagrams uniform gradient series and geometric sequence – Nominal and effective interest rates continuous compounding and continuous cash flows – Applications of engineering economy methods of investment assessment – Comparing alternatives useful life is equal to the study period – The imputed market value technique – Depreciation historical methods and cost recovery systems.
NE 467 – Management of Energy Resources
Cr.3. Prerequisite: None
Energy for sustainable development - Metal and corrosive Environments - Strategic components of sustainable energy - Renewable energy technologies - Energy audit process and maintenance management – Lighting - Power factor correction - Control system and computers - Combustion processes and the use of industrial wastes - Heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC).
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 56
Course File Summary
Further description of courses including course information, grading system, course description, textbook and reference book, course aim and objectives, and course outline.
This chapter provides further description of the courses of the Electrical Engineering program. The course files are organized as follows:
Basic and Applied Science Courses – BA
Computer Engineering Courses – CC
Electronics and Communications Courses – EC
Electrical Engineering Courses – EE
Industrial and Management Engineering Courses – IM
Language, Humanities, & Social Science Courses – LH
Mechanical Engineering Courses – ME
Non-Engineering Courses – NE
Chapter
4
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 57
Basic and Applied Science Courses – BA
BA 113 – Physics (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Physics (1).
Code: BA113.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial-2 Hrs. Laboratory – 1 Hr. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class. Experimental physics 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
This course consists of four parts static electricity, electric current, magnetism and light.
T E X T B O O K S
Hans C. Ohanian and John T. Markert, Physics for engineers and scientists, W.W. Norton & Co.; latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett, Physics for scientists and engineers, Brooks Cole; latest edition.
Michael Nelkon and Philip Parker, Advanced level physics , Heinemann International Literature & Textbooks, latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
The aim of this course is to Supply the students with strong back ground in the field of electricity and magnetism which is really needed for the to complete their study in the field of engineering and technology.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
This course provides the students with good knowledge about the nature and the existence of static electricity, the interaction between different type of charges and the electric field types generated by these charges. The course also, allows the student to distinguish between the static electricity and
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 58
the electric current through the application of ohm‟s law and gives the student basic information about the structure of simple electric circuit. This course gives a good background about the theory of magnetism and electromagnetic Induction.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to static electricity and Coulomb‟s law (1).
Week Number 2: Introduction to static electricity and Coulomb‟s law (2).
Week Number 3: Electric field.
Week Number 4: Electric potential.
Week Number 5: Capacitors (1).
Week Number 6: Capacitors (2).
Week Number 7: Exam # 1.
Week Number 8: Electric current, ohm‟s law resistors in series and parallel (1).
Week Number 9: Electric current, ohm‟s law resistors in series and parallel (2).
Week Number 10: Kirchhoff‟s rule.
Week Number 11: Introduction to theory of magnetism and different applications.
Week Number 12: Exam # 2.
Week Number 13: Electromagnetic induction.
Week Number 14: Optics and waves (nature of light, properties of light waves).
Week Number 15: Young‟s double slit „polarization of light waves.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 59
BA 114 – Physics (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Physics (2).
Code: BA114.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial-2 Hrs. Laboratory – 1 Hr. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA113 - Physics (1)
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
This course is concerned with the investigation of the behavior of the fluid under different conditions to calculate the net work done on or by the system.. It is also concerned with standing the first and second law of thermodynamics. Heat, work and internal energy of the fluids (liquid and gas) should be calculated for different processes under different condition. Heat transfer is also studied through this course.
T E X T B O O K S
T. D. Eastop and A. Mcconkey, Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologists, Prentice Hall, latest edition .
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
References available in AAST Library.
C O U R S E A I M
The aim of this course is to develop the skills of students to solve the problems of Heat and thermodynamics and understanding the different cases and condition under which thermodynamic system operates.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The objectives of this course are: Understanding the relation between heat, work and the conservation of energy through thermodynamic cycle. Also, the student must know the relation between the different units used through this Course.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 60
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to thermodynamics.
Week Number 2: Reversibility and reversible work.
Week Number 3: First law of thermodynamics‟ Non-flow equation.
Week Number 4: Steady flow equation.
Week Number 5: Working Fluid (1.1) (steam).
Week Number 6: Working Fluid (1.2) (steam).
Week Number 7: Working Fluid (2.1) (perfect gas).
Week Number 8: Working Fluid (2.2) (perfect gas).
Week Number 9: Reversible processes.(constant volume, constant pressure).
Week Number 10: Reversible processes (constant temperature, adiabatic).
Week Number 11: Reversible process ( polytropic).
Week Number 12: Second law of thermodynamics (1).
Week Number 13: Second law of thermodynamics (2).
Week Number 14: Heat transfer (1).
Week Number 15: Heat transfer (2).
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
T O O L S R E Q U I R E D :
Use of the steam tab
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 61
BA 118 – Chemistry
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Chemistry.
Code: BA118.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Laboratory – 2 Hrs. Credit – 2.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Lab., Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
The Science of Chemistry characterized its close relate with the other branches of sciences and with the technological applicants of these sciences and with technological applicants of these sciences, which emerge in the mineral oil, medicate, petroleum, petrochemicals, chemical textile and other industries. This course includes topics of specialized chemical engineering technology without going through details.
T E X T B O O K S & R E F E R E N C E S
William D. callister Jr., Material Science and engineering ,Third edition 1994.
M.G.Fontana ,Corrosion Engineering ,1984.
H.H Uppal and R.v. Revice., Corrosion and corrosion control ,Third edition 1985.
M.M uppal., Engineering Chemistry, 1990.
National Geographic.vol 176, No.G, 1989.
Drew principhic.vol. 176, No.G, 1989.
Drew principles of industrial water treatment. Third edit. Drew chemical corporat.
Corrosion for science Engineering and Edit K R Trethewey 1995.
C O U R S E A I M
The aim of course develops for the student, bases of scientific engineering chemistry, and creative student‟s scale to identify the technical problems which are related to engineering chemistry.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Establishing a base for students. Providing the student with knowledge about the effects of the environment on the material whatever its form is indifferent purposes. Accruing Scientific bases
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 62
which equality the student to control dominate and protect the used materials. Enabling the student to solve industrial problems in a scientific method.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Electrochemical Reactions and cells. volumetric Analysis (Practical).
Week Number 2: Principles of corrosion. Titrate Technique, Determinate of acidity (practical).
Week Number 3: Metals and corrosive Environments. Determinate of Alkalinity and chloride (practical).
Week Number 4: Forms of corrosion uniform, Galvanic and Differential aeration cell. Determination of Hardness (Practical).
Week Number 5: Pitting, stress corrosion cracking and intergranular corrosion forms. Determination of Dissolved oxygen (Practical).
Week Number 6: Atmospheric and Erosion Corrosion. Spectrophotometer Analysis (Practical).
Week Number 7: Coating and inhibitors as protection methods. Determination of nitrite and nitrate (Practical),
Week Number 8: Cathodic protection. Determination of phosphate and silica (Practical).
Week Number 9: Classification of fuel, properties of liquid fuel. Determination of some heavy Metals (Practical).
Week Number 10: Combustion of fuel. Determination of fluorine and chlorine (Practical).
Week Number 11: Air supply and Exhaust Gases. Determination of turbidity (Practical).
Week Number 12: Classification of lubricants Advantages and disadvantages of different types. Oil Analysis Determination of Viscosity and T.B.N (Practical).
Week Number 13: Properties of lubricants and Additives. Determination of Insoluble and Saltwater (Practical).
Week Number 14: Nature of impurities in water, soft and hard water Effect of using impure water on Boilers performance. Determination of Acidity and water content (Practical).
Week Number 15: Water Treatment. Determination of PH (Practical).
Week Number 16: Air and water pollution. Determination of TDS and salinity(Practical).
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 63
BA 123 – Mathematics (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Mathematics (1).
Code: BA123.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
The aim of this course is the differentiation and some of its applications, basic differentiable functions of one variable. It includes definitions and intuitive meanings of derivatives; Higher derivatives; Basic techniques of differentiation; Chain Rule; Parametric equations; Partial differentiation; Implicit differentiation; Inverse function theorem; Logarithmic differentiation; differentiation; Logarithmic functions; Exponential functions; Trigonometric functions; Inverse trigonometric functions; Hyperbolic functions; Differentiation of those; Physical and geometric applications of differentiation; Limits; Nth derivative; L‟Hôpital rule; Maclaurin‟s expansion as approximations of functions; Analytic geometry; Translation of Axes; Conic sections.
T E X T B O O K S
Robert T. Smith and Roland B. Minton, Calculus: Early Transcendental Functions, Mc GRAW. Hill, latest edition.
Printed Notes.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Grossman S., Calculus, Harcourt Brace College Publishers, 1992.
C O U R S E A I M
This course teaches students main transcendental functions and their basic properties, differentiation and some of its applications; as well as analytic geometry and quadratic curves.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 64
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The course teaches basic transcendental functions and their properties. It develops students‟ skills in the techniques of differentiation, and enables them to grasp its intuitive meaning. It also provides them with essential knowledge and skills in analytic geometry.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Basic techniques and rules of differentiation.
Week Number 2: Trigonometric function: properties, basic identities and their derivatives.
Week Number 3: Inverse of trigonometric and their derivatives.
Week Number 4: Logarithmic functions: their properties, basic identities and derivatives.
Week Number 5: Exponential functions: their properties, basic identities and derivatives.
Week Number 6: Derivative of hyperbolic functions and their inverse.
Week Number 7: Parametric differentiation and implicit differentiation.
Week Number 8: The Nth derivative.
Week Number 9: L‟ Hopital rule.
Week Number 10: Partial differentiation.
Week Number 11: Maclaurin‟s expansion.
Week Number 12: Physical application.
Week Number 13: Curve sketching.
Week Number 14: Conic sections.
Week Number 15: General revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 65
BA 124 – Mathematics (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Mathematics (2).
Code: BA124.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA123 - Mathematics (1)
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
This course addresses integration and some of its geometric applications, as well as elementary matrix algebra. It includes definitions and intuitive meanings of indefinite and definite integrals; Fundamental Theorem of Calculus; Basic techniques of integration; Integration by parts; Geometric applications; Integration of powers of trigonometric functions; Substitution; Miscellaneous and Trigonometric substitutions; Integration of rational functions in x through partial fractions; Numerical Integration. Gauss‟ method for the solution of linear equations; Matrix inversion and its use in the solution of linear equations.
T E X T B O O K S
Robert T. Smith and Roland B. Minton, Calculus: Early Transcendental Functions, Mc GRAW. Hill, latest edition.
Printed Notes.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Grossman S., Calculus, Harcourt Brace College Publishers, 1992.
C O U R S E A I M
To learn integration using different methods. To use these techniques in solving some application like to find the area, the volume, the length of a curve, and the average of a curve. To solve problems using numerical integration. To learn elementary linear algebra, solution of linear equations using matrices and determinants.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 66
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The course develops students‟ skills in the techniques of integration, and enables them to grasp its intuitive meaning. It also provides them with essential knowledge and skills in matrix algebra.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Definition of indefinite integrals and table of famous integrals.
Week Number 2: Simple rules of integration and the fundamental theorem of calculus.
Week Number 3: Fundamental theorem of calculus and integration by parts.
Week Number 4: Integration by parts and integration of rational functions.
Week Number 5: Integration of rational functions.
Week Number 6: Integration of trigonometric powers.
Week Number 7: Trigonometric substitution and 7th week exam.
Week Number 8: Integration of quadratic forms and the reduction formulas.
Week Number 9: Definite integration.
Week Number 10: Area and volume.
Week Number 11: Area, volume and length of curve.
Week Number 12: Average of a function, numerical integration and 12thweek exam.
Week Number 13: Matrix Algebra.
Week Number 14: Solution of systems of linear equations.
Week Number 15: General revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 67
BA 141 – Engineering Mechanics (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Engineering Mechanics (1).
Code: BA141.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction to mechanics. Plane and space force analysis, projection and synthesis. Moments. Couples and wrenches. Static equilibrium. Technique of free body diagrams. Applications of static equilibrium of machines, Method of virtual work and its application to solution of problems of static equilibrium.
T E X T B O O K S
R.C. Hibbeler, Engineering Mechanics: Statics, Macmillan USA, latest edition .
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Books available in the AAST Library
C O U R S E A I M
The aim of the course is to provide the student with an introduction to many of the fundamental concepts in Mechanics
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The course treats only rigid-body mechanics, science it forms a suitable basis for the design and analysis of many types of structural, mechanical or electrical devices encountered in engineering
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Rectangular components of a force.
Week Number 2: Parallelogram law.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 68
Week Number 3: Equilibrium of particle – springs and cables.
Week Number 4: Moment of force.
Week Number 5: Free body diagram.
Week Number 6: Equilibrium of rigid body.
Week Number 7: Exam # 1.
Week Number 8: Trusses “joint method – zero – force members”.
Week Number 9: Trusses “method of section”.
Week Number 10: Frames.
Week Number 11: Frames (cont.).
Week Number 12: Exam # 2.
Week Number 13: Friction
Week Number 14: Mass Moment of Inertia
Week Number 15: Virtual work
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 69
BA 142 – Engineering Mechanics (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Engineering Mechanics (2).
Code: BA142.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA141.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction of the kinematics of the particle, rectilinear and projectile motions, force and acceleration. Moreover, work and energy of a particle, rotation of a body about a fixed axis, general plan motion, relative velocity and acceleration, equations of translation – rotational.
T E X T B O O K S
R.C. Hibbeler , Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics, Macmillan USA, latest edition .
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Books available in the AAST Library.
C O U R S E A I M
The aim of the course is to provide a clear and thorough presentation of the theory and applications of engineering mechanics.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The course objectives are to study the geometry of motion (Kinematics) as well as the relationship between the motion of a body and the forces and the moments acting on it (Kinetics).
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Kinematics of a particle – Rectilinear Kinematics.
Week Number 2: Curvilinear Motion – Projectile Motion.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 70
Week Number 3: Force & Acceleration (Kinetics).
Week Number 4: Work & Energy of a particle (Kinetics).
Week Number 5: Rotation of a Rigid Body about a fixed Axis.
Week Number 6: General Plan Motion.
Week Number 7: Exam # 1.
Week Number 8: Relative Motion (Velocity).
Week Number 9: Relative Motion (Acceleration).
Week Number 10: Planar Kinetics of Rigid Body – Equation of Translation Motion.
Week Number 11: Equation of Rotational Motion.
Week Number 12: Exam # 2.
Week Number 13: Equation of General Plane Motion.
Week Number 14: Work and Energy.
Week Number 15: Revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 71
BA 223 – Mathematics (3)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Mathematics (3).
Code: BA223.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA124 – Mathematics (2).
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Solving first order differential equations: Separable of variables, Homogeneous equation, Exact equation, Linear equation and Bernoulli's equation. Solving second order homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equations with constant and variable coefficients. Undetermined coefficients and variation of parameters methods. Laplace transformations, basic properties, first shifting theorem, unit step function, second shifting theorem, transform of derivatives and integrals, and inverse Laplace transforms. Solving differential equations by using Laplace transform. Fourier series: Fourier series for even, odd, and harmonic functions.
T E X T B O O K S
Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics , John Wiley, 9th edition , 2006 .
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
D.G.Zill and M.R.Cullen , Advanced Engineering Mathematics, PWS Publishing Company, 1992.
K.A.stroud and Dexter J. Booth, Engineering Mathematics, Palgrave Macmillan, latest edition.
C.Ray Wylie and Louis C. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, McGraw-Hill Inc., latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
To study varies methods of solving differential equations, which arise as mathematical modeling in many topics of engineering.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 72
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To study differential equations, Laplace transform and Fourier analysis, that is of fundamental importance in modern engineering and science.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Solving first order differential equations: Separable of variables and Homogeneous equation.
Week Number 2: Solving first order differential equations: Exact and Linear equations.
Week Number 3: Solving first order differential equations: Bernoulli's equation and revision on first order differential equations.
Week Number 4: Solving second order homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients. Method of undetermined coefficients.
Week Number 5: Solving second order non-homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients. Method of variation of parameters.
Week Number 6: Continue method of variation of parameters. Solving second order differential equations with variable coefficients (Euler's equation).
Week Number 7: Laplace transform: Basic definition, First shifting theorem.
Week Number 8: Laplace transform: Transform differentiation and integration.
Week Number 9: Unit step function, second shifting theorem, and convolution theorem.
Week Number 10: Inverse Laplace transforms.
Week Number 11: Solving differential equations by using Laplace transform.
Week Number 12: Fourier series: Fourier series for functions of period 2P.
Week Number 13: Fourier series for even and odd functions.
Week Number 14: Fourier series for harmonic functions.
Week Number 15: Revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 73
BA 224 – Mathematics (4)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Mathematics (4)
Code: BA 224
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 223 – Mathematics (3)
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
This course gives a comprehensive study on the 2D and 3D vectors: algebra, differential and integral calculus , and the physical interpretation of the integral theorems. The course also gives a study on the complex functions, its differentiation and integration, the residue theorems and its application to real integrals.
T E X T B O O K S
Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley, 9th edition, 2006 .
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
D.G.Zill and M.R.Cullen , Advanced Engineering Mathematics, PWS Publishing Company, 1992.
C O U R S E A I M
This course aims at enhancing the students knowledge in the subject of “Vector Differential and Integral calculus” as well as Complex Analysis and Integration needed to solve engineering problems at higher level of the under graduate engineering studies.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Through this course the student gets to know:
Vector Differential Calculus
Vector Integral calculus
Complex Analytic Functions and Complex Integration.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 74
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Vector Algebra / Dot and cross product and Applications.
Week Number 2: Partial Differentiation / and Derivatives of vector functions.
Week Number 3: Gradient / Divergence/ curl/ Laplacian.
Week Number 4: Line Integrals / line Integrals Independent of the path / Exactness.
Week Number 5: Conservative vector fields.
Week Number 6: Double Integrals in Cartesian and polar coordinates / Green‟s Theorem,
Week Number 7: Surface Integrals / Stokes‟ Theorem /7th week Exam.
Week Number 8: Triple Integrals / Divergence (Gauss‟ Theorem).
Week Number 9: Review on Integrals Theorems.
Week Number 10: Complex numbers and functions / forms of representation.
Week Number 11: Analytic functions/ Harmonic functions.
Week Number 12: Line complex integrals / Cauchy‟s Integrals Theorem /12th week Exam.
Week Number 13: Zeros and poles of Analytic functions/ Residues and their evaluation.
Week Number 14: Residue Theorem / Application to Real Integral.
Week Number 15: Introduction to Fourier Integrals and Transforms.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 75
BA 323 – Mathematics (5)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Mathematics (5).
Code: BA 323.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 224 – Mathematics (4).
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
In the first of this course we discuss the solution of ordinary differential equations with variable coefficients using Taylor's, power series and Frobenius methods, then we go into some special differential equations, as Legendre and Bessel differential equations which lead us to some special functions, as Legendre, Bessel, Gamma and Beta functions. After that we study the method of separation of variables to solve partial differential equations that help us to study some applications like heat transfer in a bar, vibrating of a string and potential fields. In the last of this course we discuss some special complex transformations, conformal mappings, such as bilinear and Schwarz Christoffel transformations.
T E X T B O O K
Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley, 9th edition, 2006 .
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Dennis G. Zill & R. Cullen. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. PWS Publishing Co.,1992
Birkhoff, G. and G.-C. Rota, Ordinary Differential Equations. 4th ed. New York: Wiley, 1989.
John, F., Partial Differential Equations. 4th Ed. New York: Springer, 1982.
Hanna, J. R. and J. H. Rowland, Fourier series, Transforms and Boundary Value Problems. 2nd ed. New York: Wiley, 1990.
Bieberbach, L., Conformal Mapping. New York: Chelsea, 1964.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 76
C O U R S E A I M
When dealing with some physical problems, an ordinary or partial differential equation arises. Our course aims to give the student the ability to extract exact solutions of these problems.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
Solve ordinary differential equations with variable coefficients.
Solve partial differential equations with the method of separation of variables.
Deal with some special functions.
Construct some special complex functions.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Taylor's and Power series methods for solving ordinary differential equations.
Week Number 2: Differential equation with variable coefficients, ordinary and singular points, solution about ordinary points.
Week Number 3: Solution about singular points: Regular singular points, the method of Frobenius - Case I.
Week Number 4: The method of Frobenius - Case II and Case III.
Week Number 5: Gamma and Beta functions.
Week Number 6: Lengendre differential equation and Legendre polynomials.
Week Number 7: Bessel differential equation.
Week Number 8: Bessel function of the 1st kind.
Week Number 9: Boundary value problems, partial differential equations and the method of separation of variables.
Week Number 10: Heat equation - heat transfer in a bar.
Week Number 11: Wave equation - vibration of a string.
Week Number 12: Laplace equation and potential fields.
Week Number 13: Conformal mappings - Complex functions as mappings.
Week Number 14: Bilinear transformations – linear fraction transformation.
Week Number 15: Schwarz Christoffel transformation.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 77
BA 327 – Probability and Numerical Methods
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Probability and Numerical Methods.
Code: BA 327.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 124 – Mathematics (2).
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Probability / Statistics – Probability : Events , Sample Spaces and Probability , conditional Probability , Independent Events , Bay‟s theorem ; Discrete Probability Distribution; Continuous Probability Distribution ; Special Distributions – Numerical Methods/ Roots of Equations : Bracketing Methods (The Bisection and The False – Position Methods ) , Open Methods ( Simple Fixed Point Iteration ; The Newton-Raphson Method ; The Secant Method) , Curve Fitting : Interpolation (Newton‟s Divided-Difference Interpolating polynomials; Lagrange Interpolating Polynomials; Inverse Interpolation).
T E X T B O O K S
Probability and statistics for engineering students (copy).
Numerical methods (copy).
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Erwin Kreyszig , “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “, Wiley International Edition.
C O U R S E A I M
The course aims to provide the students with an understanding of the basic concepts of probability, statistics and different sampling distributions and also give the aid for solving complicated mathematical problems with numerical methods techniques and the ability of fitting data.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Understanding the basic concepts probability, statistics and different sampling distributions.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 78
Introduce different numerical techniques that solving mathematical equations and tools for fitting the data by interpolation methods.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to Statistics.
Week Number 2: Probability: Events, Sample Spaces and Probability.
Week Number 3: Conditional Probability.
Week Number 4: Independent Events, Bay‟s theorem.
Week Number 5: Discrete Probability Distribution.
Week Number 6: Continuous Probability Distribution.
Week Number 7: 7th Week Exam.
Week Number 8: Introduction to Numerical Methods.
Week Number 9: The Bisection and the False – Position Methods.
Week Number 10: Simple Fixed Point Iteration; the Newton-Raphson Method; The Secant Method.
Week Number 11: Interpolation: Newton‟s Divided-Difference Interpolating polynomials.
Week Number 12: 12th Week Exam.
Week Number 13: Lagrange Interpolating Polynomials.
Week Number 14: Inverse Interpolation.
Week Number 15: Revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 79
Computer Engineering Courses – CC
CC 111 – Introduction to Computers
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Introduction to Computer Science.
Code: CC111.
Hours: Lecture – 1 Hrs. Laboratory – 2 Hrs. Credit – 2.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
This course provides an introduction to computers and computing .Topics of interest include the impact of computers on society, ethical issues, and hardware /software applications, including internet applications, system unit, storage and input/output devices, numbering systems, system and application software, presentation skills, program development, programming languages, and flow charts, Visual Basic, web page design using HTML, and communications and networks.
T E X T B O O K S
Charles S. Parker, Deborah Morley, “Understanding Computers Today and Tomorrow”, Course Technology 2009, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Cashman, Shelly, Wood, and Dorin, “HTML: Complete concepts and technologies”, Thomson course technology, latest edition.
Peter Norton, “Introduction to computers”, McGraw Hill, latest edition.
Robert J. Spear and Timothy M. Spear, “Introduction to computer programming in Visual basic 6.0”, Thomson Learning, latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
The students must have a general understanding of what computers are and how they operate.
The students must have good skills in using windows, MS PowerPoint, HTML and Visual Basic.
The students must learn problem solving techniques and program development.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 80
The student should know the available programming languages and their capabilities.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
At the end of the course the student should be able to:
Identify computer hardware components and their specifications and types.
Use Windows, MS PowerPoint, HTML, and Visual Basic.
Understand and use numbering systems.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to the World of Computers Input and Output.
Week Number 2: The System Unit: Processing and Memory.
Week Number 3: Storage and Input/output Devices.
Week Number 4: System Software and Application Software.
Week Number 5: Quiz 1 + Program Development, Programming Languages, and Flow charts.
Week Number 6: Visual Basic 1.
Week Number 7: 7th Week Exam.
Week Number 8: Visual Basic 2.
Week Number 9: Visual Basic 3.
Week Number 10: Quiz 2 + Web page design using HTML 1.
Week Number 11: Web page design using HTML 2.
Week Number 12: 12th Week Exam.
Week Number 13: Communications and Networks 1.
Week Number 14: Communications and Networks 2.
Week Number 15: Ethics, Computer Crime, Privacy, and other Social Issues.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 81
CC 112 – Structured Programming
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Structured Programming.
Code: CC112.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Laboratory – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: CC111.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
An introduction to C-language Programming is provided in this course, Variable/Constant definitions, Basic Programmes, Sequential Programming, Conditional Programming, Looping and repetitions, Functions, Arrays as well as searching and sorting techniques.
T E X T B O O K S
J.Hanly and E. Koffman,”C Program Design for Engineers”, Addison Wesley, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
H.Schildt,”C, the complete reference “, Osborne McGraw Hill, latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
Introducing Structured programming techniques associated with the C-Language, used to program most nowadays systems. Studying their application to practical problems with special emphasis on some practical applications concerning different disciplines.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Studying C-language programming techniques, sequence, selection and repetition control structures, functions, Arrays, sorting and searching techniques.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Overview of Programming and Problem Solving.
Week Number 2: C Syntax and Semantics.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 82
Week Number 3: I/O Formatting and Arithmetic.
Week Number 4: Conditions and Logical Expressions.
Week Number 5: Selection Control Structures.
Week Number 6: Repetitions (Part 1).
Week Number 7: 7th Week Exam.
Week Number 8: Repetitions (Part 2).
Week Number 9: Functions (Part 1).
Week Number 10: Functions (Part 2).
Week Number 11: Arrays (Part 1).
Week Number 12: 12th Week Exam.
Week Number 13: Arrays (Part 2).
Week Number 14: Programming applications – problem solving Tech (Part 1).
Week Number 15: Programming applications – problem solving Tech (Part 2).
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 83
CC 213 – Programming Applications
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Programming Applications.
Code: CC 213.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: CC 112.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Revision of structured programming constructs: selection, repetition, and Functions - Revision of one dimensional array - Searching and sorting - Two dimensional arrays – Pointers – Strings – Structures – Unions – Recursion - Text Files - Binary Files - Bitwise Operators/ I/O Interfacing - Advanced Applications..
T E X T B O O K
J.Hanly and E. Koffman, ”C Program Design for Engineers”, Addison Wesley, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
H.Schildt,”C, the complete reference “, Osborne McGrawHill, latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
Introducing different programming techniques associated with the C-Language, used to program most nowadays systems. Studying their application to practical problems with special emphasis on some practical applications concerning different disciplines.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to: Studying C-language programming techniques, files, pointers, structure, string, and array.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Revision of structured programming constructs: selection, repetition, and Functions.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 84
Week Number 2: Revision of one dimensional array.
Week Number 3: Searching and sorting.
Week Number 4: Two dimensional arrays.
Week Number 5: Pointers.
Week Number 6: Strings.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam.
Week Number 8: Structures.
Week Number 9: Structures/Unions.
Week Number 10: Recursion.
Week Number 11: Text Files.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam.
Week Number 13: Binary Files.
Week Number 14: Bitwise Operators/ I/O Interfacing.
Week Number 15: Advanced Applications.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 85
CC 216 – Digital Logic Design
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Digital Logic Design
Code: CC 216
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: CC 111.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Number systems - binary arithmetic and codes - logic gates - Boolean algebra and logic simplifications - Design and realization of combinational circuits - Functions of combinational circuits logic - Flip-Flops - analysis design and realization of counters - analysis and realization of shift registers - Computer aided engineering.
T E X T B O O K
Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
M. Mano, “Digital Design”, Prentice Hall, latest edition.
J. P. Hayes, “Introduction to Digital Logic Design”, Addison Wesley, latest edition.
David M. Buchla, “Experiments in Digital Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall, latest edition.
Texas Instruments Data Sheets, latest version.
C O U R S E A I M
To develop engineering skills in the design and analysis of digital logic circuits with applications to digital computer.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
Knowing the basic differences between analog and digital systems
Use binary numbers and codes
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 86
Describe the operation of logic gates
Applying Boolean algebra on K-map
Design a combinational and sequential logic circuits to simplify function
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to digital concepts.
Week Number 2: Number systems, operations, and codes.
Week Number 3: Logic gates.
Week Number 4: Boolean algebra and logic simplification – part 1.
Week Number 5: Boolean algebra and logic simplification – part 2.
Week Number 6: Functions of combinational logic.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam.
Week Number 8: Decoders, encoders, MUX, DMUX – part 1.
Week Number 9: Decoders, encoders, MUX, DMUX – part 2.
Week Number 10: Flip-Flops and related devices – part 1.
Week Number 11: Flip-Flops and related devices – part 2.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam.
Week Number 13: Flip-Flops applications.
Week Number 14: Counters.
Week Number 15: Shift registers.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 87
CC 411 – Introduction to Microprocessors
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Introduction to Microprocessors
Code: CC 411
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: CC 312 or CC216.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Microprocessors and microcomputers - Microcomputer structure – microprocessor – memory - buses (synchronous and asynchronous) - I/O - 16/32-bit microprocessor architecture - Instruction cycle – microinstructions - micro-programming - instruction decoding - Reduced Instruction Set computer (RISC) architecture - Complex Instruction Set computer (CISC) architecture - Memory (RAM, ROM, memory mapping of I/O) - I/O (parallel and serial I/O interfaces, system clock, clock phases and bit rates) - Interrupts (types, handling of interrupts) - Software aids (text editors and assemblers, linkers and macro-assemblers).
T E X T B O O K
Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi “80x86 IBM PC and compatible computers”, Prentice Hall, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors”, Prentice Hall, latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
Identify The Microprocessors Category and study the internal structure and external connections of an example microprocessor (Intel 80386).
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to Work with the Intel 80386 microprocessor, its connected peripherals, and its assembly language format.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 88
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to microprocessors Historical background.
Week Number 2: 80386 Microprocessor architecture.
Week Number 3: Real mode software model.
Week Number 4: Addressing modes.
Week Number 5: The instruction set & Machine Language coding.
Week Number 6: Protected mode Architecture Model.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam.
Week Number 8: Virtual memory Management.
Week Number 9: Memory Interface.
Week Number 10: DRAM.
Week Number 11: Input/output interface.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam.
Week Number 13: Interrupts and exception processing.
Week Number 14: The 486 and Pentium microprocessors family.
Week Number 15: Revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 89
Electronics Engineering Courses – EC
EC 238 - Electronics (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electronics (1)
Code: EC238
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE231
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Semiconductors - p-n junction - diode current components - junction capacitance - junction diode as a circuit element - special p-n junctions - bipolar junction transistor and field effect transistor: structure, operation – I-V characteristics - large and small analysis.
T E X T B O O K S
Boylestad, Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 1991.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
B.Streetman & S.Banerjee,”Solid State Electronic Devices”, Prentice Hall 2000.
C O U R S E A I M
Introducing different electronic devices used in constructing modern electronic circuits: diodes – bipolar junction transistor and field effect transistor. Studying their performance with special emphasis on some practical applications.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Studying semiconductor materials, p-n junction diodes, diode as a circuit element, special diodes, Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT) and Field Effect Transistor (FET).
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Types of solids: conductor, insulator, semiconductor.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 90
Week Number 2: Conduction and valence bands, energy gap, covalent bond – Semiconductor types – Doping of semiconductors.
Week Number 3: Mobility and conductivity in semiconductors (intrinsic and extrinsic) – Hole and electron concentration - Drift current.
Week Number 4: Diffusion and drift currents – Built-in voltage in a p-n junction – Depletion layer in a p-n junction.
Week Number 5: p-n junction diode - Forward and reverse bias - Diode as a circuit element.
Week Number 6: Half wave and full wave rectifier - Smoothing circuits - Clipping circuits - Clamping circuits.
Week Number 7: Special diodes: Zener diodes - Light emitting diodes (LEDs) – Photodiodes - Varactor diodes - Solar cells.
Week Number 8: Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT): construction – types – symbol - energy band diagram– operation - dc equivalent circuit.
Week Number 9: BJT: dc solution and biasing circuits - bias stability.
Week Number 10: BJT: I-V Characteristics of BJT - Load line - Operating point – h-parameters.
Week Number 11: BJT: Small signal analysis – ac equivalent circuit – Transistor amplifier - Voltage and current gains.
Week Number 12: Field Effect Transistor (FET): (1) Junction FET (JFET): construction – symbol – operation – I-V characteristics - JFET biasing circuits.
Week Number 13: Metal oxide semiconductor FET: MOSFET: construction – symbol – operation.
Week Number 14: I-V Characteristics of MOSFET, Enhancement and depletion modes, E-MOSFET: construction, operation and I-V characteristics - ac solution of all FET types.
Week Number 15: Complementary MOSFET (CMOS): symbol - operation - Logic gates using CMOS.
Week Number 16: Final exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 91
EC 339 - Electronics (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electronics (2)
Code: EC 339
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EC 238
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N :
Electronic amplifier theory, power amplifiers, Differential amplifiers, Operational amplifiers filters and Oscillators.
T E X T B O O K S
C.J.Savant, M.S.Rooden, G.L.Carpenter, ”Electronic Design”, Addison Wesley
Martin Rodan and Gordon Carpenter, " Electronic Design: from concept to reality"
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Sedra & Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, 5th edition, 2004.
Boylestad, Nashelsky, Electronic Devices&circuit theory, Prentice Hall, 2005
C O U R S E A I M
The student should be able to analyze and design BJT and FET amplifiers, Power amplifiers, operational amplifiers, filters and oscillators.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Familiarize students with:
Analysis and design of BJT
Analysis of FET amplifiers
Frequency response of BJT and FET.
Power Amplifiers
Analysis and design of integrated circuits
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 92
Filters and Oscillators
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Revision, Transistor theory, Amplifier circuits, course overview
Week Number 2: Mid frequency-band equivalent circuit of transistor amplifiers. Voltage gain, current gain, input and output impedance.
Week Number 3: Low and High frequency response of transistor amplifiers. Design of transistor amplifiers.
Week Number 4: Multistage amplifiers, overall gain, frequency response, gain-bandwidth product.
Week Number 5: Field Effect transistor amplifiers, DC and mid-band frequency solution.
Week Number 6: Power amplifiers, classes of operation. Efficiency, push-pull power amplifiers.
Week Number 7: Feedback amplifiers.
Week Number 8: Sinusoidal oscillators.
Week Number 9: Square wave oscillators.
Week Number 10: Operational amplifiers, specifications. Analysis of basic Op-Amp circuits (Inverting and non-Inverting amplifiers), applications.
Week Number 11: Op-Amp applications.
Week Number 12: RC active filters.
Week Number 13: Power supplies, switching mode power supply.
Week Number 14: Introduction to IC fabrication.
Week Number 15: Revision
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 93
Electrical and Control Engineering Courses – EE
Automatic Control Courses Group
EE 211 – Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation (1)
Code: EE 211
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 231
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Accuracy of measurement and error analysis. Absolute and secondary instruments and indicating instrument. Moving coil and moving iron instruments. Dynamometer type instruments. Induction type instruments. Wattmeter of Measuring of power and power factor. Bridges (DC). Bridges (AC). Current and potential transformers. Oscilloscopes.
T E X T B O O K
J.B. Gopta, “A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation”, Prentice- Hall, 2002.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
W. Dally, F. Riley and G. McConnel, ”Instrumentation for Engineering Measurements”, John Wiley and Sons, N.Y., 1993.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To introduce the basic concepts of measurement techniques and the construction and characteristics of the different types of indicating instruments.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Accuracy of Measurement and error analysis I.
Week Number 2: Accuracy of measurement and error analysis II.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 94
Week Number 3: Absolute and Secondary instruments.
Week Number 4: Secondary circuit instrumentation.
Week Number 5: Moving coil instruments.
Week Number 6: Moving iron instruments.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Dynamometer type instruments.
Week Number 8: Induction instruments.
Week Number 9: Measuring of Active power.
Week Number 10: Measuring of power factor.
Week Number 11: DC Bridges.
Week Number 12: 12th week + AC Bridges.
Week Number 13: Current transformers.
Week Number 14: Potential transformers.
Week Number 15: Oscilloscope.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 95
EE 218 – Instrumentation and Measurements
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Instrumentation and Measurement
Code: EE 218
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE238
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction to feedback control loop, instrument. Major specifications related to choice of measuring instruments. Measurement of pressure. Measurement of temperature. Level measurement. Flow measurement. Viscosity, PH measurement, oxygen analyzer. Displacement and velocity measurement. Force and torque measurement. Data analysis, measures of centrality, dispersion. Strain gauges and related bridges. Study of comparators, and error detectors. Transducers (Electric / pneumatic / Electro mech). Amplifiers (electric / pneumatic). Actuators (electric / pneumatic).
T E X T B O O K
Johnson, Curtis, “Process control Instrumentation technology", Prentice Hall., latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Chesmond, C.J. “Basic control system technology" ELBS,1989
Bartelt, Terry ,“Instrumentation and process control", Thompson Delmar,2007
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To investigate different methods for remote measuring.
To study how transducers operate and their characteristic
To study how to analyze data obtained from measurements.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 96
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to feedback control (1).
Week Number 2: Introduction to feedback control (2).
Week Number 3: Physical Measurements.
Week Number 4: Introduction to feedback systems.
Week Number 5: Liquid level instruments.
Week Number 6: Liquid flow instruments.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + PH+Viscosity.
Week Number 8: Displacement + velocity measurements.
Week Number 9: Force and torque measurements.
Week Number 10: Data analysis.
Week Number 11: Error detectors/comparators.
Week Number 12: 12th week + Electric/pneumatic transducers.
Week Number 13: Cont(Amplifier transducers).
Week Number 14: Actuation.
Week Number 15: Revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 97
EE 311 – Fundamentals of Control Engineering
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Fundamentals of control eng.
Code: EE 311
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA224
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
General revision of Laplace transforms, test input signals. Open loop systems and closed loop systems Transfer function and basic system properties. Block diagram reduction techniques. Signal flow graph reduction techniques. Time response of 1st.and 2nd order systems modeling of some physical, electrical, mechanical and thermal systems. Sensitivity of feedback control systems error analysis ,system types and error constants. Concept of stability analysis, Routh-Hurwitz, relative stability concept and effect of poles and zeros. Analysis & simple electromechanical systems Proportional Integral Derivative controller. System response to P, PI and PID.controller tuning technique (Open loop –Closed loop).
T E X T B O O K
Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall., 1995.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Ogata , "Modern control Engineering", Prentice – Hall , 1985
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To present and introductory yet comprehensive definition of terms and mathematical tools used in the study of control systems
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Modelling of systems.
Week Number 2: Open loop systems.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 98
Week Number 3: Closed loop systems.
Week Number 4: Block diagram reduction.
Week Number 5: Signal flow graph techniques.
Week Number 6: Transfer function.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Modeling of some electrical circuits.
Week Number 8: System properties.
Week Number 9: Error analysis and system type.
Week Number 10: Stability analysis.
Week Number 11: Time response of 1st and 2nd order.
Week Number 12: 12th week + Concept of poles and zeros.
Week Number 13: Analysis & simple electromech.
Week Number 14: Improving system response.
Week Number 15: Analysis of higher order.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 99
EE 312 – Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation (2)
Code: EE 312
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE211
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Displacement, velocity, pressure , temperature sensors. Level , flow torque and other sensors. Signal conditioning. Data acquisition and conversion. Fundamentals of digital voltmeters. Digital voltmeters, Digital multimeters. Accuracy of digital voltmeters.
T E X T B O O K
Johnson, Curtis, “Process control Instrumentation technology", Prentice Hall., 2006
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Gregory, B.A. “An introduction to Electrical Instrumentation and measurement systems “, MacMillan Press, 1981
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To present sensors, transducers and data acquisition systems
To present the fundamentals of digital instrumentation
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Primary sensing elements.
Week Number 2: Primary sensing elements.
Week Number 3: Primary sensing elements.
Week Number 4: Primary sensing elements.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 100
Week Number 5: Primary sensing elements.
Week Number 6: Data acquisition and A/D conversion.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Data acquisition and A/D conversion.
Week Number 8: Data acquisition and A/D conversion.
Week Number 9: Fundamentals of digital measurements.
Week Number 10: Digital voltmeters.
Week Number 11: Digital voltmeters.
Week Number 12: 12th week + Signal generators.
Week Number 13: Counter –time interval measurements.
Week Number 14: Magnetic records and self balancing.
Week Number 15: Magnetic records and self balancing.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 101
EE 411 – Control Systems (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Control systems (1)
Code: EE 411
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE311
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Mathematical modeling of physical systems. Frequency response analysis. Polar plots. Bode diagrams. More topics on Bode diagrams. Concept of stability in control systems. Routh‟s stability criterion. Nyquist stability criterion. Application of Nyquist stability criterion on Bode plots. Root locus method. More topics on root locus. Types of compensators in control systems. Lead compensation in root locus. Lead compensation in frequency domain. Feed forward control. Lag compensation in frequency domain. PID compensation.
T E X T B O O K
Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall., 1995.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
K. . Ogata, “Modern control Engineering” Prentice – Hall, 1985
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To attain the ability to analyze and design of control system via classical approaches
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Mathematical modelling of systems.
Week Number 2: Frequency response analysis.
Week Number 3: Polar plots.
Week Number 4: Bode diagrams.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 102
Week Number 5: Advanced topics of bode diagrams.
Week Number 6: Concept of stability in control system.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Routh‟s stability criterion.
Week Number 8: Nyquist stability criterion.
Week Number 9: Stability criterion and Bode plots.
Week Number 10: Root locus methods.
Week Number 11: More topics on root locus.
Week Number 12: 12th week + Types of compensators in control systems.
Week Number 13: Lead compensation in root locus.
Week Number 14: Lead compensation in frequency domain.
Week Number 15: Lag / PID compensators.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 103
EE 412 – Control Systems (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Control systems (2)
Code: EE 412
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE411
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introducing the topic and stating the definitions of new terminology. State model of linear systems using physical variables. State - space representation using phase variables. State - space representation using canonical variables. Properties of transition matrix and solution of state equation. Poles - zeros, eigenvalues and stability in multivariable system. Introduction to pole placement in state feedback in state feedesign. Introduction to pole - placement in state feedback design. Introduction to nonlinear control systems. Nonlinear systems theory and common non-linearities. Describing function method. Nature and stability of limit cycle. The phase- plane method.
T E X T B O O K
Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall., 1995.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
K. . Ogata , “ Modern control Engineering “ Prentice – Hall , 1985
Bishop,Robert H, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education.,2008
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Enhancement of the skills related to developing to the state space models and nonlinear control systems
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Lead compensation design.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 104
Week Number 2: Lag compensation design.
Week Number 3: Lag-Lead compensation design.
Week Number 4: Lead compensation by frequency response.
Week Number 5: Lag compensation by frequency response.
Week Number 6: Introduction to state-space.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Methods of state space representation.
Week Number 8: Solution of state equation.
Week Number 9: Controllability – observability.
Week Number 10: State variable feedback.
Week Number 11: Introduction to digital control systems.
Week Number 12: 12th week + The z- transform.
Week Number 13: Block diagram of digital systems.
Week Number 14: Time response of digital systems.
Week Number 15: Stability analysis for digital systems.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 105
EE 413 - Microprocessor Based Process Control
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Microprocessor based process control
Code: EE 413
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE411
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Types of Process Control Strategy- Type of Signal and Signal Conditioning- Analogue and digital Signal Conditioning - Discrete State Process Control- A/D and D/A Conversion- Data Acquisition Systems- Microprocessor and Microcontroller as digital control- Microcontroller Programming- Special Instructions of Microcontrollers- Applications.
T E X T B O O K
C.D. Johnson, "Process Control Instrumentation Technology", Prentice Hall., latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
D. Ibrahim, "Microcontroller Based Applied Digital Control', John Wiely, 2006
S. F. Barrett, D. J. Pack, "Atmel AVR Microcontroller Primer: Programming and Interfacing", Morgan and Claypool Publishers, 2008
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Covering the measurement and signal conditioning interfacing and data acquisition continuous and discrete state control microprocessor.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Types of Process Control Strategy.
Week Number 2: Type of Signal and Signal Conditioning
Week Number 3: Analogue Signal Conditioning.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 106
Week Number 4: Digital Signal Conditioning.
Week Number 5: Discrete State Process Control.
Week Number 6: A/D and D/A Conversion.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam +Digital Control System Fundamentals.
Week Number 8: Data Acquisition Systems.
Week Number 9: Characteristics of Control System.
Week Number 10: Microprocessor and Microcontroller as digital control.
Week Number 11: Microcontroller Principles and Configurations.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Microcontroller Programming.
Week Number 13: Special Instructions of Microcontrollers.
Week Number 14: Applications 1.
Week Number 15: Applications 2.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 107
EE 416 - Microcontroller Applications
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Microcontroller Applications
Code: EE 416
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: CC442 Digital logics and microprocessors
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction to Microcontrollers and Architectures with a review of various types available in the market - C-language programming overview - AVR Microcontroller basic structure - AVR Microcontroller basic programming principles - Timers and Counters, PWM – Analogue interfacing of AVR Microcontrollers - Serial interfacing standards using RS-232 principles of the PC - Serial Interfacing of the AVR Microcontroller.
T E X T B O O K
S. F. Barrett, D. J. Pack, "Atmel AVR Microcontroller Primer: Programming and Interfacing", 2008, Morgan and Claypool Publishers
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
D. V. Gadre ”Programming and Customizing the AVR Microcontroller”, 2001, Mc Graw Hill
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Understand the basic principles of Microcontrollers,
Provide a review of C-language programming,
Provide a description of microcontroller peripherals and applications
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to Microcontrollers and Architectures with a review of various types available in the market
Week Number 2: C-language programming overview – 1.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 108
Week Number 3: C-language programming overview – 2.
Week Number 4: AVR Microcontroller basic structure.
Week Number 5: AVR Microcontroller basic programming principles – 1 (Basic IO design).
Week Number 6: AVR Microcontroller basic programming principles – 2 (Basic IO design).
Week Number 7: 7th week exam
Week Number 8: Timers and Counters, PWM.
Week Number 9: Analogue interfacing of AVR Microcontrollers.
Week Number 10: Serial interfacing standards using RS-232 principles of the PC.
Week Number 11: Serial Interfacing of the AVR Microcontroller.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam
Week Number 13: Applications – 1.
Week Number 14: Applications – 2.
Week Number 15: Applications – 3.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 109
EE 418 – Automatic Control Systems
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Automatic control systems
Code: EE 418
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE218 OR EE 328
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction to open loop and closed loop control system. Control system classification. Block diagram. System transfer function and signal flow graph. Standard input signal. Time domain specifications. Modelling of some physical systems. Time response of first and second order systems. Importance of feedback, sensitivity to parameter variations. System stability and effect of disturbance. Error analysis and error constants. Root locus techniques. Frequency domain analysis (Nyquist- Bode) Analogue controllers. Controller tuning.
T E X T B O O K
Benjamin C.Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall, Inc, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Y. El Gamal A.Amer, “Introduction to Control Engineering”, AAST 1988
Nagrath 80 Gapal, “Control System Engineering”, John Wiley & Son, NY 1982
K.O.Gatw, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall New Delhi, 1984
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Stability concept and time domain analysis using time and frequency response
Modelling and analysis of simple physical system are investigated
To study controller units, their type analysis and tuning
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to control system.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 110
Week Number 2: Differential equation of physical systems.
Week Number 3: Block diagram models using MATLAB.
Week Number 4: Signal flow graph models using MATLAB.
Week Number 5: Test input signals.
Week Number 6: Performance of 1st and 2nd order system.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Effect of 3rd pole and a zero on the 2nd order system.
Week Number 8: Stability concept Routh- Hurwitz stability criterion.
Week Number 9: Root locus techniques.
Week Number 10: Bode plots.
Week Number 11: Nyquist plots.
Week Number 12: 12thweek + Approaches to system design, advantage of feedback.
Week Number 13: Approaches to system design, advantage of feedback.
Week Number 14: Analogue controllers.
Week Number 15: Analogue controllers (2).
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 111
EE 419 – Modern Control Engineering
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Modern control engineering
Code: EE 419
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 418
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
General revision for root locus and frequency response. Lead compensator design by root locus method. Lag compensator design by root locus method. Lag lead compensator design by root locus method. Lead compensator design by frequency response technique. Lag compensator design by frequency response technique. Introduction to state space representation. Methods of writing state equation. Solution of the state equation. Controllability and observability. State variable feedback. Introduction to digital control systems. The z- transform. Block diagram representation digital systems. Time response of digital systems. Stability analysis for digital systems.
T E X T B O O K
G. F. Franklin & J.D. Powell & A.E. Naeinin, “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, Addison Wesley Publisher, Latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
K. Ogata, “Modern control Engineering “Prentice – Hall, 1985
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To enable the students to get acquainted with the classical methods of design the state space method of design for both continuous and discrete time systems.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Lead compensation design.
Week Number 2: Lag compensation design.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 112
Week Number 3: Lag-Lead compensation design.
Week Number 4: Lead compensation by frequency response.
Week Number 5: Lag compensation by frequency response.
Week Number 6: Introduction to state-space.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam+ Methods of state space representation.
Week Number 8: Solution of state equation.
Week Number 9: Controllability – observability.
Week Number 10: State variable feedback.
Week Number 11: 12th week exam + Introduction to digital control systems.
Week Number 12: The z- transform.
Week Number 13: Block diagram of digital systems.
Week Number 14: Time response of digital systems.
Week Number 15: Stability analysis for digital systems.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 113
EE 511 – Discrete Control Systems
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Discrete control systems
Code: EE 511
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 412
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Z-transform and its properties. Pulse transfer function. Linear difference equation. Signal analysis and dynamic response. Analysis of sampled data systems. Block diagram and closed loop transfer function of discrete data systems. Stability analysis of discrete data systems. Root locus in the z-plane. Frequency response method. Design of discrete data systems using compensating networks. State-space description and solution.
T E X T B O O K
Chalrles L. Phililips & H. Troy Nagle, "Digital Control System Analysis and Design", Pearson Education International, 1998
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
D. De Fetta, J.Lucas and W. Hootgkiss, “Digital Signal Processing: A system Design Approach”, J. Wiley, 1988.
P. Lynn and W. Furest, “ Introductory Digital Signal Processing”, J. Wiley, 1990
C. Phillips, “Digital Control System Analysis and Design”, Prentice Hall, 1990
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The main emphasis of this course is to provide insight into the analysis and design of discrete- data systems using classical control approach.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction of digital control systems.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 114
Week Number 2: Z- Transform and its properties.
Week Number 3: Discrete data system representation.
Week Number 4: Inverse Z transform and response.
Week Number 5: Sampler and zero order hold in cascade with the continuous system.
Week Number 6: Discrete closed loop transfer function.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Stability analysis of discrete control systems.
Week Number 8: Error analysis of discrete control systems.
Week Number 9: Root locus technique for discrete data control systems.
Week Number 10: Design of digital control loops using root locus technique.
Week Number 11: Frequency response analysis of discrete data control systems.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Design of discrete control loops using frequency response approach.
Week Number 13: Design of discrete data control system using PID controller in the time domain.
Week Number 14: PID tuning in the frequency domain for discrete data control system.
Week Number 15: General review on discrete control loop design.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 115
EE 512 – Automated Industrial Systems (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Automated industrial systems (1)
Code: EE 512
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 411 OR EE 418
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Automated hierarchical levels and components. Detecting sensors and actuating elements, relay logic and their applications. Introduction to PLC.S. Types of PLCs and construction. Hardware configuration and descriptions. Programming and testing basic functions. Programming and testing advanced functions. Industrial Applications using PLCs
T E X T B O O K
J. Hackworth, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications", Pearson Education, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
John W.Webb, “Programmable logic controllers, Pronciples and applications”, 2nd Edition, 1992
Hans Berger, “ Automating with the SIMATIC 55”, 2nd edition 1992, Siemens AG
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To update the student on objectives, structures and behaviour of automated systems , programmable logic controllers and applications in industrial systems
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Automated hierarchical and components.
Week Number 2: Building blocks of automation.
Week Number 3: Data acquisition system.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 116
Week Number 4: Multiplexing/De-multiplexing.
Week Number 5: Computers and industrial control.
Week Number 6: Introduction to PLC.S.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Methods of representation.
Week Number 8: Programming or testing of basic function.
Week Number 9: Programming of advanced functions.
Week Number 10: PLC in industrial Applications.
Week Number 11: Industrial applications.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Control applications.
Week Number 13: Industrial control applications.
Week Number 14: Industrial control applications (2).
Week Number 15: PLCs applications.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 117
EE 513 – Control Application in Power Engineering
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Control application in power engineering
Code: EE 513
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 411
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Control problems in electrical power system. An introduction to Modelling of turbines and synchronous machine using state space approach. Linearized simulation on model in the s-domain of one machine connected to infinite-bus system. Dynamic performing of the controlled one machine / infinite - bus system Excitation control problem: definition and control configuration of classical and modern systems. Transfer function model excitation system Excitation system compensation (power system stabilizer) Effect excitation system on generator steady – state stability limit and dynamic stabilization. Generation control problem: definition and element modelling. Power factor-control of isolated system using PID controller. Power factor-control of two area system.
T E X T B O O K
Lecturer Notes
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
P. M Anderson, and A.A. Fouad " Power System Control and Stability", Iowa State University Press, U.S.A, 1977
Hadi Saadat, "Power System Analysis", McGraw Hill, 1999
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing detailed skills related to the subject of control problems and their application in power system engineering.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 118
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Control problems in electrical power system – An introduction.
Week Number 2: Control problems in electrical power system – An introduction.
Week Number 3: Modelling System Components in power system Dynamics.
Week Number 4: Modelling System Components in power system Dynamics.
Week Number 5: Modelling System Components in power system Dynamics.
Week Number 6: Modelling System Components in power system Dynamics.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Excitation control Systems-QV control.
Week Number 8: Excitation control Systems-QV control Channel.
Week Number 9: Excitation control Systems-QV control Channel.
Week Number 10: Excitation control Systems-QV control Channel.
Week Number 11: Generation control systems-PF control Channel.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Generation control systems-PF control Channel.
Week Number 13: Generation control systems-PF control Channel.
Week Number 14: Generation control systems-PF control Channel.
Week Number 15: Generation control systems-PF control Channel.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 119
EE 514 – Robotics
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Robotics
Code: EE 514
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 142
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
What is a robot's components / Classification and Applications Kinematics for manipulators, joints, links and gripper. Coordinate frames and transformation. Determination of coordinate frames –Orientation of end –effector. Inverse solution to Kinematics equations Calculation of inverse transformation between coordinates An inverse solution Kinematic solution Generalized velocity and torque relations. Velocity and acceleration in fixed and rotating coordinates Jacobean matrix /rotational and transnational acceleration Dynamic models of manipulators State variable representation for robot dynamic models Motion control and controller design for gross & fine motion of robot manipulators .Design specifications based on second - order linear system Controller design (using optimum control) for robot manipulators and discussion survey on sensors and actuators.
T E X T B O O K
Philip John, “Introduction to Robotics”, Edison Wesley Publisher, 1991
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
M. Shahipoor, " A Robot Engineering Textbook", Harbor & Row Pub. , NY , 1987
R.J. Schilring ," Fundamentals of Robotic Analyzing & Control ", Prentice -Hall ,1990
W. Stadler , " Analytical Robotics and Mechatronics" , McGraw-Hill Int. , 1995
L. Sciavico, B. Siciliano , " Modeling and Control of Robot", McGraw-Hill Inc., 1997
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Get the students in Electrical and Control Engineering Department familiar with industrial robots in order to put such industrial robots into perspective as a tool in manufacturing automation.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 120
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Robotic systems.
Week Number 2: Rigid motion and homogenous transformation.
Week Number 3: Homogenous transformation.
Week Number 4: Direct (forward) kinematics.
Week Number 5: Direct (forward) kinematics.
Week Number 6: Inverse solution of kinematic equation.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Inverse solution of kinematic equation.
Week Number 8: Velocity (differential) kinematics.
Week Number 9: Velocity (differential) kinematics.
Week Number 10: Velocity (differential) kinematics.
Week Number 11: Velocity kinematics (cont) and manipulator dynamics.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Manipulator robot dynamics.
Week Number 13: Robot dynamics and robot control.
Week Number 14: Robot control.
Week Number 15: Robot control.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 121
EE 515 – Computer Control of Dynamic Systems
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Computer control of dynamic systems
Code: EE 515
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 411 or EE 418
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Review state-space description of discrete time systems. Solution of discrete time state equations. Derivation of transfer function from state-space model. Controllability and observability of discrete time systems. Realization theory. Minimal representation digital redesign of continuous time controllers. Digital implementation of the PID controller. Pole assignment of discrete systems. Implementation of state observers for the use with state feedback control.
T E X T B O O K
K.J. Astrom & B. Wittenmark, “Computer Controlled Systems: Theory and Design” , Prince –Hall, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Ogata . “ Modern control Engineering” ,Prince –Hall, 1997
R. G. Jacquot, "Modern Digital Control Systems", Marcel Dekker, 1994
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Implementation of the PID controller on the microprocessor lab.
Making use of MATLAB to design discrete-time controller for a selected plant
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to computer control.
Week Number 2: Review for state-variable representation of discrete time systems.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 122
Week Number 3: Controllability, observability of the discrete system (1).
Week Number 4: Controllability, observability of the discrete system (2).
Week Number 5: Realization of a discrete system.
Week Number 6: Digital redesign of continuous controllers.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Digital redesign of continuous controllers.
Week Number 8: State space approach for discrete control design.
Week Number 9: State space approach for discrete control design (1).
Week Number 10: State space approach for discrete control design (2).
Week Number 11: PC based data acquisition systems.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + PC based data acquisition systems.
Week Number 13: Applications.
Week Number 14: Applications.
Week Number 15: Applications.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 123
EE 516 – Modern Control Systems
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Modern control systems
Code: EE 516
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 412 OR EE 418
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Further state-space analysis: Linear systems with multiple eignvalues, Non linear state-space representation, Linearization, Jacobian matrices, Decomposition of system into controllable and uncontrollable parts, Deadbeat response-pole assignment with state and with output feedback. Use of observer. Introduction to advanced control topics: optimal control. Adaptive control systems. System identification of dynamic systems, least squares, Theory and implementation for system estimation.
T E X T B O O K
K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
D.B. Miron, “Design of Feedback Control Systems”, Harcourt Brace Jouanovior Publishers, 1989
Robert H Bishop, "Modern Control Systems", Pearson Education, 2005
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To extend state-space analysis and gain an appreciation of recent advances in control engineering such as pole assignment, observers design, introduction to optimal, adaptive and identification techniques.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: State space analysis for L.S (1).
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 124
Week Number 2: State space analysis for L.S (2).
Week Number 3: Nonlinear state space equation.
Week Number 4: Decomposition of linear systems (1).
Week Number 5: Decomposition of linear systems (20.
Week Number 6: Dead beat response.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Pole assignment by using state FB.
Week Number 8: Pole assignment by using output FB.
Week Number 9: Observer and state estimation.
Week Number 10: Introduction to linear optimization (1).
Week Number 11: Introduction to linear optimization (2).
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Introduction to self tuning systems.
Week Number 13: Introduction to self tuning systems.
Week Number 14: System estimation (1).
Week Number 15: System estimation (2).
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 125
EE 517 – Optimal and Adaptive Control
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Optimal and adaptive control
Code: EE 517
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 412
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Review of modern approach of control system. Calculus of extremes and single stage decision Constrained extrems and lag range multipliers. Variational calculus and Euler-Lagrange Eq. Mathematical Modeling of optimization problem. The maximum principle.The Hamiltonian – Jacobi theory. Linear regulator problems. Minimum time problem. The discrete maximum principle Discrete linear quadratic problem. Adaptive control systems. Model reference adaptive control. Self-tuning adaptive control systems. Stability, problem in adaptive control systems.
T E X T B O O K
K.J. Astrom,B Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, Addison Wesley Pub., 1995
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
“Optimal Control, An introduction to Theory and its Application”, M. Athans and P.L. Falb, MacCraw-Hill, 1966
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing knowledge about both optimal control systems and adaptive control systems
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Review of modern control approach.
Week Number 2: Calculus of Extrema.
Week Number 3: Calculus of Extrema.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 126
Week Number 4: Calculus of Extrema.
Week Number 5: Mathematical modelling.
Week Number 6: Optimization techniques.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Optimization techniques.
Week Number 8: Optimization techniques.
Week Number 9: Optimization techniques.
Week Number 10: Optimization techniques.
Week Number 11: Optimization techniques.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Adaptive systems.
Week Number 13: Adaptive systems.
Week Number 14: Adaptive systems.
Week Number 15: General Revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 127
EE 518 – Automated Industrial Systems (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Automated Industrial Systems (2)
Code: EE 518
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 512
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Building blocks of automation. Automatic production and assembly. Additional topics regarding programmable logic controllers (PLC‟s). Analog signals processing. Integral blocks. Communications capabilities: Data interchange, local area network (LAN), communication protocols, Different communications. Industrial application examples.
T E X T B O O K
C.R. Ashahl, “Robots and Manufacturing Automation”, John Wiley, 1992
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
W Bolton, "Programmable Logic Controllers", Newnes, 2005
John H. Dunning, "Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers", Thompson Learning, 2002
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
This course introduces additional principles and capability of programmable systems. It provides the student with guidelines on how to select and implement equipment to meet the practical requirements encountered in industrial systems.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Additional Topics regarding PLCs.
Week Number 2: Additional Topics regarding PLCs.
Week Number 3: Additional Topics regarding PLCs.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 128
Week Number 4: Additional Topics regarding PLCs.
Week Number 5: Data Interchange and communications.
Week Number 6: Data Interchange and communications.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Data Interchange and communications.
Week Number 8: Data Interchange and communications.
Week Number 9: Data Interchange and communications.
Week Number 10: Industrial network using PLCs.
Week Number 11: Industrial network using PLCs.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Industrial network using PLCs.
Week Number 13: Industrial network using PLCs.
Week Number 14: Industrial network using PLCs.
Week Number 15: Industrial network using PLCs.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 129
Electrical machines Courses Group
EE 321 – Electrical Machines (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Machines (1)
Code: EE 321
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 232
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Definition of the magnetic terms, magnetic materials and the B-H curve. Magnetic circuits principles. Electromechanical Energy Conversion Principles. Force and torque equations in magnetic circuits. Construction of a DC machine. EMF and torque equations in dc machines. Armature windings and commutator design. Armature reaction and compensation techniques. Self excitation of dc generators. External characteristics of dc generators. Kinds of losses and efficiency of dc machine. Torque and speed characteristics of dc motor. Speed control of dc motor. Starting of dc motors. DC Motor electrical braking technique.
T E X T B O O K
B. S. Guru, "Electric Machinery and Transformers", Oxford Uni. Press, 2001
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
C.Hubert, 'Electric Machines" Maxewell Macmillan, 1991
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing knowledge about both optimal control systems and adaptive control systems
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Definition of the magnetic terms, magnetic materials and the B-H curve.
Week Number 2: Magnetic circuits principles.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 130
Week Number 3: Electromechanical Energy Conversion Principles.
Week Number 4: Force and torque equations in magnetic circuits.
Week Number 5: Construction of a DC machine.
Week Number 6: EMF and torque equations in dc machines.
Week Number 7: Armature windings and commutator design.
Week Number 8: Armature reaction and compensation techniques.
Week Number 9: Self excitation of dc generators.
Week Number 10: External characteristics of dc generators.
Week Number 11: Kinds of losses and efficiency of dc machines.
Week Number 12: Torque and speed characteristics of dc motors.
Week Number 13: Speed control of dc motors.
Week Number 14: Starting of dc motors.
Week Number 15: DC Motor electrical braking techniques.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 131
EE 322 – Electrical Machines (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Machines (2)
Code: EE 322
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 321
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th week exam):
30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th week exam):
20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Single phase transformer, Construction, principle of operation. No load conditions, leakage reactance and equivalent circuit, voltage regulation, losses and efficiency, impedance. Auto transformer. Principle of three phase machines, Construction of 3-phase stator, and general layout of three phase two pole full and short pitched winding, distribution and pitch factor. MMF of one-phase and three-phase windings. Synchronous and rotor speed theory of action of three phase induction motor. Three phase induction motors power flow, EMF and equivalent circuit. Torque speed characteristics and starting. Effect of slip and stator voltage on the performance.
T E X T B O O K
B. S. Guru, "Electric Machinery and Transformers", Oxford Uni. Press, 2001
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
C.Hubert, 'Electric Machines" Maxewell Macmillan, 1991
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing detailed skills related to the subject of single phase transformers and induction motors
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Single phase transformer; polarity & connections.
Week Number 2: No load operation of single phase transformer.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 132
Week Number 3: Per unit system for the single phase transformer.
Week Number 4: Voltage regulation, losses and efficiency.
Week Number 5: Auto transformers.
Week Number 6: Construction of three phase induction motor.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + EMF generated per phase.
Week Number 8: Actual EMF value for the 3 – phase IM.
Week Number 9: Effect of harmonics in the 3-phase IM.
Week Number 10: Rotor & synchronous speed for the 3-phase IM.
Week Number 11: Power flow of the 3-phase induction motor.
Week Number 12: 12th week + IM equivalent circuit parameters estimation.
Week Number 13: Torque/speed characteristics for the 3-phase IM.
Week Number 14: Losses & efficiency in the 3- phase IM.
Week Number 15: Speed control for the 3- phase IM.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 133
EE 326 – Electrical Engineering (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical engineering (2)
Code: EE 326
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 236
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th week exam):
20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Moving coil instruments – Moving iron instruments – Dynamometer type instruments – Induction type instruments – Wattmeters and methods of measuring power , power factor – DC machines ( Generator / motor) – Transformers – Induction motors - Synchronous machines ( generator / motor) – Special type motors – Introduction to Control Systems – Open loop and closed loop system characteristics – Control system components – transient performance of control systems – Proportional integral and derivative control and tuning.
T E X T B O O K
Lecturer note
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
R .C. Dorf, "Modern Control System", Addison Wisley, N.Y., 1992
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To investigate the different electrical measurements techniques.
To study the different electrical machines ( DC , AC).
To understand the idea of automatic control systems.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Moving coil instrument.
Week Number 2: Moving iron instrument.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 134
Week Number 3: Dynamometer type instruments.
Week Number 4: Induction type instruments.
Week Number 5: Watt-meters and power factor meter.
Week Number 6: DC Machines.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Transformers.
Week Number 8: Induction motors.
Week Number 9: Synchronous generators.
Week Number 10: Special type motors.
Week Number 11: Control systems.
Week Number 12: 12th week + Open loop & closed loop systems.
Week Number 13: Control system components.
Week Number 14: Transient response.
Week Number 15: PID controllers.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 135
EE 328 – Electrical Power and Machines
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Power and Machines.
Code: EE 328
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 232
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th week exam):
20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Magnetic circuits and their basic relations. Core loss and transformer basic. Transformer model and voltage regulation. Transformer rating and testing. The law of motor and generator action – construction of dc machines. DC motors characteristics and applications. DC generators characteristics and applications . AC rotating fields and theory of 3-phase induction machines. Circuit model and variable speed drives . Synchronous generators. Single-phase and small motors.The electric power system and energy sources. Pollution problems and plant distribution systems. Switches and circuit breakers – system voltage. System protection and power factor correction.
T E X T B O O K
B. S. Guru, "Electric Machinery and Transformers", Oxford Uni. Press, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
C. Hubert, 'Electric Machines" Maxewell Macmillan, 1991
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To investigate the different stages of power system generation and distribution.
To study the basic concepts of transformers and 3-phase motors.
To study the basic of power generation and single-phase and dc machines
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Revision on electric and magnetic circuits.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 136
Week Number 2: The law of motor and generator action.
Week Number 3: DC Motors.
Week Number 4: DC Generators.
Week Number 5: Core Loss and transformer basics.
Week Number 6: Transformer model and regulation.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Transformer ratings and testing.
Week Number 8: AC rotating field.
Week Number 9: 3-phase induction motor.
Week Number 10: Synchronous machines.
Week Number 11: Single phase and small motors.
Week Number 12: 12th week + Electric power system.
Week Number 13: Plant distribution system.
Week Number 14: Protective devices and distribution of electricity in buildings.
Week Number 15: System protection & PF correction.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 137
EE 329 – Electrical Machines
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical machines
Code: EE 329
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 238
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th week exam):
20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Three phase circuits. Magnetic circuits. Transformer principles and construction. DC Generators principles and construction. Armature reaction and generation in parallel. DC Motors Principles and construction. Alternators principles and construction. Synchronous motor principles and method of starting.. 3- phase induction motor. General revision
T E X T B O O K
B. S. Guru, "Electric Machinery and Transformers", Oxford Uni. Press, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
C. Hubert, 'Electric Machines" Maxewell Macmillan, 1991
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
A study of theory and concept of Electric Machines (AC & DC).
Deriving equivalent circuit of electrical machines.
Studying performance and characteristics of machines (AC & DC).
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Review on electric circuits.
Week Number 2: Magnetic circuits.
Week Number 3: DC Machines (1): DC machines: construction-applications-theory of operation.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 138
Week Number 4: DC Machines (2): DC machines: equivalent circuit-excitation-voltage control.
Week Number 5: DC Machines (3): DC motors: starting-characteristics.
Week Number 6: DC Machines (4): DC motors: performance and speed control.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Transformers (1): construction-applications.
Week Number 8: Transformers (2): theory- equivalent circuits-tests.
Week Number 9: Transformers (3): voltage regulation- efficiency.
Week Number 10: Three Phase Induction Motors (1): construction-applications.
Week Number 11: Three Phase Induction Motors (2): rotating magnetic field-theory of operation-equivalent circuit.
Week Number 12: 12th week + 3-phase induction motor (3): characteristics-performance-starting.
Week Number 13: Synchronous Machine (1): construction- applications-equivalent circuit.
Week Number 14: Synchronous Machine (2): synchronous alternator: theory of operation-characteristics-synchronization.
Week Number 15: Synchronous Machine (3): synchronous motor.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 139
EE 421 – Power Electronic (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Power electronic (1)
Code: EE 421
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 231, EC238
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th week exam):
20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Power electronic and characteristics, basic of power electronics, thyristors gating circuits, commutation techniques. Single phase and three phase converters ( controlled and uncontrolled).
T E X T B O O K
M. H. Rashid, "Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications", Prentice Hall, 2004
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
P. C. Sen, "Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics ",John Wiely, 1989
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing in depth knowledge related to the subject of power electronic devices and A.C. - D.C. converters.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Power Diodes.
Week Number 2: Single phase half wave non-controlled rectifier.
Week Number 3: Single phase half wave non-controlled rectifier.
Week Number 4: Three phase non-controlled rectifiers.
Week Number 5: Filters.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 140
Week Number 6: Power bipolar Junction transistors characteristics.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Transistor switching.
Week Number 8: Thyristors characteristics and gating.
Week Number 9: Commutation techniques.
Week Number 10: Device protection.
Week Number 11: Single phase semi-controlled converter.
Week Number 12: 12th week + Single phase full and dual converters.
Week Number 13: Three phase half and semi-controlled converters.
Week Number 14: Three phase full and dual converters.
Week Number 15: Power factor improvement techniques.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 141
EE 422 – Electrical Machines (3)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Machines (3)
Code: EE 422
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 322
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th week exam):
20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Principle of synchronous machines, construction and emf-equivalent circuit , phasor diagram for motor generator, power equation, electrical load diagram and V- curves, parallel operation starting and synchronization, voltage regulation, effect of saliency, three phase transformer, polarity and standard terminal marking inrush current transformer, three phase connections, open –delta connection, three windings transformer-tap changer and phase conversion (3 phase/2phase and 3phase/6phase), parallel operation, current transformer.
T E X T B O O K
P.C. Sen, “Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics”, John Wiley, 1989
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
C. Hubert, 'Electric Machines" Maxewell Macmillan, 1991
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing detailed skills related to the subject of three phase transformers and synchronous machines.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: 3 - phase transformers; polarity and connections
Week Number 2: Three phase / two phase transformation
Week Number 3: Harmonics suppression in 3-phase transformers
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 142
Week Number 4: Tap changer, voltage & current transformers
Week Number 5: Parallel operation of transformers
Week Number 6: Synchronous generator construction
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + EMF & Equivalent circuit of the alternators
Week Number 8: Power equation for the synchronous generators
Week Number 9: Load angle and operation stability limits
Week Number 10: Voltage regulation in synchronous generators
Week Number 11: Synchronization between two alternators
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + V - curves of synchronous motors
Week Number 13: Starting methods of the synchronous motors
Week Number 14: Saliency effect in synchronous machines
Week Number 15: Synchronous reluctance motor
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 143
EE 423 – Power Electronics (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Power electronics (2)
Code: EE 423
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 421
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
MOSFET Power Transistor, Chopper principles and classification, the buck and the boost regulator, the buck and the cuk regulator, single phase AC voltage controllers principles, three phase full wave AC voltage controllers, Three phase full wave AC voltage controllers, Cycloconverters, principles and performance of PWM inverters, three phase inverters, other kinds of inverters, applications
T E X T B O O K
M. H. Rashid, "Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications", Prentice Hall
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
P. C. Sen, "Principles of Electrical Machines abd Power Electronics",John Wiely
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing detailed skills related to subject of D.C choppers DC-AC inverters.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: The Mosfet Power Transistor
Week Number 2: Chopper principles and classification
Week Number 3: The Buck, the boost regulators
Week Number 4: The Buck-Boost and the cuk regulators
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 144
Week Number 5: Single phase AC Voltage controllers principles
Week Number 6: Single Phase full wave AC voltage controllers
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Three phase half wave AC voltage controllers
Week Number 8: Three phase full wave AC voltage controllers
Week Number 9: Cycloconverters
Week Number 10: Principles and performance of PWM inverters
Week Number 11: Three Phase inverters
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Voltage control inverters
Week Number 13: Other kinds of inverters
Week Number 14: Applications
Week Number 15: Applications (continued)
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 145
EE 424 – Electrical Drives (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Drives (1)
Code: EE 424
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 421
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
DC Drives, single phase separately excited dc motors drives, three phase drive, dual converter, reversible drives, armature current reversal, field current reversal, closed-load/control, chopper drives, principles of: power control, regenerative brake control rheostat brake control, two/four quadrant chopper drives and multiphase choppers. AC drives, induction motor drive, stator voltage and frequency control, current control, voltage, current and frequency control, closed-loop control, synchronous motor drive with closed-loop control.
T E X T B O O K
M. El-Sharkawi, "Fundamentals of Electric Drive", Brooks/Cole USA, 2000
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
A .F. Fitzgerald, "Electric Machinery", McGraw-Hill Publishing company, 1990
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing detailed skills related to the subject of DC and AC electrical drives
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Single phase separately excited DC motor drives
Week Number 2: Single phase self excited DC motor drives
Week Number 3: Semi - converter DC drives
Week Number 4: Full – converter DC drives
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 146
Week Number 5: Dual converter
Week Number 6: Reversible drives
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Three phase drives
Week Number 8: Closed loop control of DC drives
Week Number 9: DC chopper drives for DC motors
Week Number 10: Discontinuous operation of DC chopper drives
Week Number 11: Induction motor drives, operation & performance
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Voltage and frequency control of the 3 - phase induction motor drives
Week Number 13: Current control of the 3 -phase induction motor
Week Number 14: Closed loop control of induction motor drives
Week Number 15: Synchronous motor drive
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 147
EE 521 – Special Electrical Machines
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Special Electrical Machines
Code: EE 521
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 422
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Two phase induction motor,,Single phase induction motor, Starting of single phase induction motor, Single phase commutator series motor, Energy convention in doubly salient machines, Three phase conventional reluctance machines Salient pole, synchronous reluctance machine , Stepper motor operation principles, Permanent magnet stepper motor, Variable reluctance stepper motors, Switched reluctance motors, Linear induction motors, Induction generators, Permanent magnet DC motor, Brushless DC motors
T E X T B O O K
A. F. Fitzgerald, "Electric Machinery", McGraw-Hill Publishing company, 1990
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
E. Hamdy, "Design of Small Electrical Machines", Wiley, 1994
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing detailed skills related to the subject of special electrical machines
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Two phase AC Motors
Week Number 2: Single phase AC Motors
Week Number 3: Starting of single phase AC motor
Week Number 4: Single phase commutator series motor
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 148
Week Number 5: Energy conversion in doubly salient machines
Week Number 6: Three phase conventional reluctance machines
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Salient pole synchronous reluctance motor
Week Number 8: Operation principles of stepper motors
Week Number 9: Permanent magnet stepper motors
Week Number 10: Variable reluctance stepper motors
Week Number 11: Switched reluctance motors
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Linear induction motor
Week Number 13: Induction generator
Week Number 14: Operation and performance of permanent magnet DC motors
Week Number 15: Uni and bi-directional Brushless DC motors
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 149
EE 522 – Electrical Drives (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Drives (2)
Code: EE 522
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 421, EE 422
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Elements of electric drive systems. Matching between motor and loads characteristics. Concept of traveling time and drive dynamics. Drive control techniques. Drive applications. Introduction to matrix analysis of electric machine. D-Q modeling of electric machines. Speed control of DC motors based on D-Q model. Vector control of 3 phase induction motor. Speed control of variable reluctance motor based on generalized torque matrix representation. Introduction to design of electric machines. Material selection and factors affecting the machine design. Design of single phase transformer. Design of three phase transformer. Design of DC machines.
T E X T B O O K
Lecturer notes
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
E. Hamdy, "Design of Small Electrical Machines", Wiley, 1994
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing detailed skills related to the subject of electrical machine design, drive dynamics and applications
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: DC and stationary field synchronous machines design
Week Number 2: Transformers Design
Week Number 3: Induction Motors Design
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 150
Week Number 4: D-Q model of DC machines
Week Number 5: Voltage control of DC machines based on D-Q
Week Number 6: Speed control of DC motors based on D-Q model
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Choice of electrical generators suitable for load demand
Week Number 8: Choice of electrical motors suitable for load demand
Week Number 9: Type of friction and its effect on drive dynamics
Week Number 10: Type of inertia, based on design, and its effect on drive
Week Number 11: Temperature rise cooling in electrical machines
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Material selection suitable for electrical machines
Week Number 13: Load cycle and machine ratings according to it
Week Number 14: Traction load cycle and series DC motor as a match
Week Number 15: Drive control technique applied for traction
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 151
Electrical Circuits Courses Group
EE 231 – Electrical Circuits (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical circuits (1)
Code: EE 231
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 124
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Basic d-c circuit elements, series and parallel network .Ohm‟s law and 1st & 2nd Kirchhoff‟s laws .Nodal analysis .Mesh analysis . Basic network theorems “source transformation, super position , Thevenin‟s theorem and Norton‟s theorem . max. power transfer” . Alternating current fundamentals and a-c generation. R.M.S value and average value, form factor and crisp factor. Phasor concept. Relation between current and voltage in resistors , capacitors and inductor, Response of R-L and R-C circuits . Sinusoidal response of series R.L.C circuit. Series resonance.
T E X T B O O K
J. Nilson & S.Riedel, “Electrical circuits”, Prentice Hall, 2001, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
R. L. Boylestad, “Introductory circuit analysis”, Merrill, London, 1994.
W.J. Hayt and J.E. Kemmerly, “Engineering circuit Analysis”, Mc Gram Hill International Edition, 1986.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To provide the students with the basic tools to analysis and solve for the currents and voltages in each branch of d-c circuits and to introduce the concepts of a-c circuits such as phasor , wave , and response.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 152
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Basic dc circuit elements, series and parallel Networks
Week Number 2: Ohm's law and Kirchhoff‟s laws
Week Number 3: Nodal Analysis
Week Number 4: Mesh Analysis
Week Number 5: Electric circuit theorems "source transformation"
Week Number 6: Superposition
Week Number 7: Thevenin's Theorem and Norton Theorem
Week Number 8: Maximum power transfer
Week Number 9: Alternating current Fundamentals and AC generation
Week Number 10: RMS value, average value, form factor and crisp factor
Week Number 11: Phasor concept
Week Number 12: Relation between voltage and current in resistor, capacitor and inductor
Week Number 13: Response of RL and RC circuits
Week Number 14: Sinusoidal response of RLC circuit
Week Number 15: Series Resonance
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 153
EE 232 – Electrical Circuits (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical circuits (2)
Code: EE 232
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE231
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th week exam):
30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
AC series circuit and series response revision, parallel circuit and to Y-simplification. Source transformation, superposition the node voltage method and the mesh current method. Thevenin theorem. Complex power and maximum power calculations. Three phase voltage sources. Analysis of the balanced wye – wye circuit. Analysis of the wye delta & delta wye circuit and delta delta circuit. Complex power calculation in three phase. Unbalanced and four wire three phase loads. Unbalanced Y loads with neutral (wire disconnected) or having Zo. Inductances and capacitors, series-parallel combinations. The natural response for R-L circuit. The natural response of R-C circuit. General solution of step response of R-L and R-C circuit. Sequential switching.
T E X T B O O K
J. Nilson & S.Riedel, “Electrical circuits”, Prentice Hall, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Richard C. Dorf, “ Introduction to Electric Circuits”, Pearson Education, 2008
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Enhancement of skills related to AC circuit analysis, three phase circuit balanced and unbalanced load and the natural response of R-L and R-C circuits.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: A.C. series circuit and series resonance revision - transformation.
Week Number 2: Source transformation and Node Voltage method.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 154
Week Number 3: The mesh current method thevenin theorem.
Week Number 4: Complex power & Maximum Power Calculation
Week Number 5: Three Phase Systems
Week Number 6: Balanced Y- Y Circuit
Week Number 7: - , - , - 3 Phase Systems
Week Number 8: Power Calculation in 3 Phase System
Week Number 9: Unbalanced Connected 3 Phase System
Week Number 10: 3 Phase unbalanced System
Week Number 11: Inductor and Capacitor
Week Number 12: Natural Response of R-L Circuit
Week Number 13: Natural Response of R-C Circuit
Week Number 14: Step Response of R-L & R-c Circuits
Week Number 15: Sequential Switching
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 155
EE 236 – Electrical Engineering (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Engineering (1)
Code: EE 236
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 124
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Basic circuit: Current – Voltage – Ohm‟s law – Kirchoff‟s current and voltage laws- Resistance in series or parallel - Mesh analysis – Nodal analysis. Electromagnetism; laws of magnetic force, field strength, flux density, magnetic induction. Relation between B,H,I and K, force on a conductor lying in magnetic field. Alternating current: waves, effective, and mean values, phasor representation, voltage, current and impedance as complex numbers, phasor analysis, instantaneous and complex power, RL & RC circuits, RLC circuits, analysis of A-C networks, power analysis (active, reactive, apparent, power factor). Resonance. Polyphase circuits: three-phase generation, Y-
Y, Y-, -Y and - three phase circuit analysis
T E X T B O O K
J. Nilson & S.Riedel, “Electrical circuits”, Prentice Hall, 200, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
A. B Carlson, “Circuits, Engineering Concepts and Analysis of Linear Electric Circuits”, John Wiley, 2000
R.L. Boylestad, “Introductory Circuit Analysis”, Merril, London, 1994.
W. J. Hayt and J. E. Kemmerly, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, McGraw Hill Int. Edition, 1986.
D. E. Johnson, J. R. Johnson and J.L. Hilburn, “Electric Circuit Analysis”, Prentice Hall, N. J. 1992.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To provide a through coverage of behavior of circuit elements under direct and alternating current sources.The phasor concepts and of impedance and admittance are introduced. Basic concepts of
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 156
magnetic circuit and electromagnetism are given. Three phase circuit and power calculation are covered.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Basic d-c circuit elements, series and parallel network.
Week Number 2: Resistance, Voltage, current, Ohm‟s law and Kirchoff‟s laws.
Week Number 3: Resistances in series or parallel, current divider and voltage divider.
Week Number 4: Nodal analysis
Week Number 5: Mesh analysis
Week Number 6: Laws of magnetic force
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Field strength, flux density, relation between B, H, I, K
Week Number 8: Magnetic circuits
Week Number 9: Alternating currents, waves, effective, mean values.
Week Number 10: RL, RC circuits, power calculation..
Week Number 11: Analysis of A-C networks.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Analysis of three phase circuits
Week Number 13: Analysis of three phase circuits (1).
Week Number 14: Analysis of three phase circuits (2).
Week Number 15: Analysis of three phase circuits (3).
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 157
EE 238 – Electrical Engineering Fundamentals
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical engineering fundamentals
Code: EE 238
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 124
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction. Basic d-c circuit. Resistance, voltage, current, and ohm‟s law, Kirchhaff‟s laws. Resistances in series or parallel. Mesh analysis. Nodal analysis. Source transformation. Superposition, voltage and current divider. Laws of magnetic force. Field strength, flux density. Relation between B,H,I,K. Alternating current generation . Waves, effective value and mean value. Phasor representation. Voltage, current and impedance as complex numbers. Phasor analysis. Instantaneous and complex power.
T E X T B O O K
J. Nilson & S.Riedel, “Electrical circuits”, Prentice Hall, latest edition
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
A. B Carlson, “Circuits, Engineering Concepts and Analysis of Linear Electric Circuits”, John Wiley, 2000
R.L. Boylestad, “Introductory Circuit Analysis”, Merril, London, 1994.
W. J. Hayt and J. E. Kemmerly, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, McGraw Hill Int. Edition, 1986.
D. E. Johnson, J. R. Johnson and J.L. Hilburn, “Electric Circuit Analysis”, Prentice Hall, N. J. 1992. course objectives
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To study the basic circuit. To study the circuit theorems. and investigate the laws of magnetic force.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 158
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction
Week Number 2: Basic circuit
Week Number 3: Resistance, voltage, current, and ohm‟s law.
Week Number 4: Kirchoff‟s laws.
Week Number 5: Resistances in series or parallel.
Week Number 6: Mesh analysis
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Node analysis
Week Number 8: Source transformation
Week Number 9: Superposition, voltage and current divider
Week Number 10: Laws of magnetic force
Week Number 11: Field strength, flux density.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Relation between B, H, I, K
Week Number 13: Alternating current.
Week Number 14: Waves, effective value.
Week Number 15: Power.
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 159
EE 331 – Electric & Magnetic Field (1)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electric & Magnetic Field (1)
Code: EE 331
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 223
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Vector analysis and coordinate systems. Coulomb‟s law and Electric field intensity. Electric flux density , Gauss‟s law and Divergence theorem .Energy and potential (Electrostatics).Conductors, Dielectric , and capacitance. Poisson‟s and la- place‟s equations.
T E X T B O O K
William H. Hayt, Jr. “ Engineering Electromagnetics" 5th Edition, Mc Gram – Hill , 1989
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
R.V. Buckley “ Work out Electromagnetic Fields “ Macmillan work out series, 1988
Fawwaz T. Ulaby, "Electromagnetics for Engineers", Pearson Education, 2005
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Vector analysis.
Week Number 2: Coordinate systems.
Week Number 3: Coulomb‟s law.
Week Number 4: Coulomb‟s law.
Week Number 5: Electric field intensity
Week Number 6: Electric flux density.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Gauss‟s law.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 160
Week Number 8: Divergence theorem.
Week Number 9: Energy and potential.
Week Number 10: Energy and potential.
Week Number 11: Energy and potential
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Conductors, Dielectric, and capacitance
Week Number 13: Conductors, Dielectric, and capacitance.
Week Number 14: Conductors, Dielectric, and capacitance.
Week Number 15: Poisson‟s and La Place‟s equations.
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 161
EE 332 – Network Analysis
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Network analysis
Code: EE 332
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA 224, EE232
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introducing the topic and illustrating its importance for elec. Eng. Complex frequency method for different input forms. Laplace transform and relation between current and voltage for resistance, capacitance and inductance. Laplace transform and electric circuit sources. The impulse function in circuit analysis. Laplace transform and the concept of transfer function. The concept of magnetic coupling. Analysis of magnetic coupled circuits. Linear transformers. Ideal transformers. Two – port networks and it‟s different equation forms. Evaluation of its parameter. Analysis of terminated two-port circuits. Interconnected two – port networks. Revision and a set of solved examples.
T E X T B O O K
W. J. Hayt and J.E. Kemmerly, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, McGraw-Hill International, 1993
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
D. E. Johnson, J.R. Johnson and J.L. Hilbnce, “Electric circuit Analysis”, Prentice–Hall, N.J. , 1992.
James E. Nilson, “Electric circuits”, Addison–Wesley, 1993.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To give the students the skills of analysis electrical networks using complex frequency approach and Laplace transform. To apply such approaches to magnetically coupled circuits and the two port networks.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introducing the topic and illustrating it importance for electrical eng.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 162
Week Number 2: Complex frequency method for different wave forms.
Week Number 3: Laplace transform and relation between current and voltage for resistance, capacitance and inductance.
Week Number 4: Laplace transform and electric circuit sources
Week Number 5: The impulse function in circuit analysis
Week Number 6: Laplace transform and the concept of transfer function.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + The concept of magnetic coupling
Week Number 8: Analysis of magnetically coupled circuits.
Week Number 9: Linear transformers
Week Number 10: Ideal transformers.
Week Number 11: Two – port networks and it‟s different equations form
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Evaluation of its parameter.
Week Number 13: Analysis of terminated two-port circuits.
Week Number 14: Interconnected two – port networks.
Week Number 15: Revision and a set of solved examples
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 163
EE 333 – Electric & Magnetic Field (2)
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electric & Magnetic Field (2)
Code: EE 333
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial/Lab – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 331
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
The steady magnetic field. Analogy between steady magnetic field and Electro static field. Magnetic forces. Magnetic Materials and Inductance. Time varying fields. Maxwell‟s four equations. The uniform plane wave.
T E X T B O O K
William H – Hayt , Jr. “ Engineering Electro Magnetics", 5th Edition, Mc Gram – Hill , 1989
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
R.V. Buckley, “Work out Electromagnetic Fields”, Macmillan work out series, 1988
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Understanding the basic theory of steady magnetic and time varying fields and Maxwell‟s equations
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: The steady magnetic field
Week Number 2: The steady magnetic field
Week Number 3: The steady magnetic field
Week Number 4: Analogy between steady magnetic field and Electro static field.
Week Number 5: Magnetic forces
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 164
Week Number 6: Magnetic forces.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam + Magnetic materials and inductance
Week Number 8: Magnetic materials and inductance
Week Number 9: Magnetic materials and inductance
Week Number 10: Time varying fields
Week Number 11: Time varying fields
Week Number 12: 12th week exam + Time varying fields
Week Number 13: Maxwell‟s four equations.
Week Number 14: The uniform plane wave
Week Number 15: The uniform plane wave.
Week Number 16: Final exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 165
Electrical Power Courses Group
EE341 – Introduction to Power Engineering
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Introduction to Power Engineering.
Code: EE 341.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 232.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
This course explains the elements of power system. Operating voltage choice. Parameters of overhead trans. Lines (R, L&C). Representation of O.H.T.L. (Short T.L.). Representation of O.H.T.L. (Medium T.L.). Representation of O.H.T.L. (Long T.L.). Voltage regulation. Corona phenomenon and its calculations. Mechanical design (Sag calculations, at the same level). Mechanical design (Sag calculations at different levels). Mechanical design (Insulators), types of poles & towers. Underground cables (Construction, types). Underground cables (Electric field & insulation measurements).
T E X T B O O K
J. Glover & M.Sarma “ Power system analysis and design”, PWS publishers, Boston, 1993.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
A. Gule & W. Paterson, “Electrical Power Systems”, Vol. I & II, Pergman press, London, 1980.
J. Glover & M.Sarma “ Power system analysis and design”, PWS publishers, Boston, 1993.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing general view about power system elements, overhead transmission lines parameters, constants and mechanical design of over head trans. Lines
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 166
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Elements of power system
Week Number 2: Operating voltage choice
Week Number 3: Parameters of overhead trans. Lines (R & L)
Week Number 4: Parameters of overhead trans. lines (C)
Week Number 5: Representation of O.H.T.L. (1)
Week Number 6: Representation of O.H.T.L. (2)
Week Number 7: Representation of O.H.T.L. (3)
Week Number 8: Voltage regulation
Week Number 9: Corona phenomenon and its calculations
Week Number 10: Mechanical Design of O.H.T.L. Sag (1)
Week Number 11: Mechanical Design of OHTL Sag (2)
Week Number 12: String insulators
Week Number 13: Types of poles & towers
Week Number 14: Underground cables (Construction , types)
Week Number 15: Insulation resistance and electric field
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 167
EE342 – Power Systems I
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Power Systems I.
Code: EE 342.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 341.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th week exam):
30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Single line diagram of power system. The per unit system. Bus admittance matrix. Bus impedance matrix. Power flow equations. Gauss- Seidel power flow solution. Newton Raphson power flow solution. Synchronous generator for power control. Tap changing transformers. Non linear function optimization. Economic dispatch neglecting losses and no generator limits. Economic dispatch neglecting losses and including generator limits. Economic dispatch including losses.
T E X T B O O K
Hadi Saadat, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw- Hill, 2002
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Guile & W. Paterson, “Electrical power systems”, vol. I & II Pregamaon press, London, 1980
W. Stevenson & J.Grainger , “ power system Analysis” , McGraw Hill , 1994
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To present methods of power systems analysis and design in sufficient depth to the student through understanding of the analysis of power systems.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Single line diagram of power system.
Week Number 2: The per unit system.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 168
Week Number 3: Bus admittance matrix.
Week Number 4: Bus impedance matrix.
Week Number 5: Power flow equations.
Week Number 6: Gauss- Seidel power flow solution.
Week Number 7: Gauss- Seidel power flow solution.
Week Number 8: Newton Raphson power flow solution.
Week Number 9: Newton Raphson power flow solution.
Week Number 10: Synchronous generator for power control.
Week Number 11: Tap changing transformers.
Week Number 12: Non linear function optimization.
Week Number 13: Economic dispatch neglecting losses and no generator limits.
Week Number 14: Economic dispatch neglecting losses and including generator limits.
Week Number 15: Economic dispatch including losses.
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 169
EE441 – Power Systems II
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Power Systems II.
Code: EE 441.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 342.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Transients in R-L Series Circuits. Internal voltage of loaded machines under faults conditions. Fault calculation using Z bus. The selection of circuit breakers. The symmetrical components of
unbalanced phasors. Power in terms of symmetrical components. Sequence circuits of & impedance. Unsymmetrical faults on power systems and single line to ground faults. Line to line faults and double line to ground faults. The stability problem. Rotor dynamics and swing equation. The power equation and synchronizing power coefficients. Equal-area criterion of stability. Step-by-step solution of the swing curve. Factors affecting transient stability.
T E X T B O O K
Hadi Saadat, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw-Hill, 2002
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Gule & W. Paterson, “Electrical Power Systems”, Vol. I & II, Pergman press, London, 1980.
J. Glover & M.Sarma “ Power system analysis and design”, PWS publishers, Boston, 1993.
Eelgrass, “Electrical energy systems theory”, McGraw Hill, 1983.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Together with Power Systems I , the aim is to present methods of power system analysis and design in sufficient depth to give the student a thorough understanding of the analysis of power systems at the undergraduate level.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 170
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Economic dispatch including losses.
Week Number 2: Internal voltage of loaded machines under fault conditions
Week Number 3: Fault calculation using Zbus.
Week Number 4: The selection of circuit breakers
Week Number 5: Symmetrical components
Week Number 6: Power in terms of symmetrical components
Week Number 7: Sequence Networks
Week Number 8: Unsymmetrical faults
Week Number 9: More unsymmetrical faults
Week Number 10: Power system stability
Week Number 11: Further consideration of the swing equation.
Week Number 12: The power angle equation
Week Number 13: Equal-area criterion of stability.
Week Number 14: Further applications of equal-area criterion
Week Number 15: Step-by-step solution of the swing curve
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 171
EE442 – Power Systems Protection I
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Power System Protection I
Code: EE 442
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 441
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
General principles of protection– Types of relays and construction of over current relays– Instrument transformers – Fuses and Circuit breakers – Over-current relay settings – Directional relays– Protection of lines and distance protection Differential protection– Protection of transformers– Protection of motors– Protection of generators.
T E X T B O O K
A.T Johns & S.K. Salman, “Digital Protection for Power System”, Peter Peregrinus, 1995
E F E R E N C E B O O K S
M. Chander, “Power System Protection and Switch Gears”, New Age International Limited Publishers, 2002
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To provide a through coverage of principles of operation of the different types of relays, circuit breakers and fuses in Power System Protection and the appropriate circuit for the protection of the various components of Power System.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: General principles of protection
Week Number 2: Types of Relays and construction of over current relays
Week Number 3: Instrument Transformers
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 172
Week Number 4: Fuses
Week Number 5: Circuit Breakers (1)
Week Number 6: Circuit Breakers (2)
Week Number 7: Over current relays‟ settings
Week Number 8: Transmission Line Protection (1).
Week Number 9: Transmission Line Protection (2)
Week Number 10: Differential Protection
Week Number 11: Protection of transformers (1)
Week Number 12: Protection of transformers (2)
Week Number 13: Protection of Motors
Week Number 14: Generator Protection
Week Number 15: General revision
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 173
EE448 – Electrical Power
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Power .
Code: EE 448.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 329
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Elements of Power Systems. Comparison of different transmission Systems. D.C. Distribution. A.C. Distribution. Mechanical Design of O.H.T.L. Resistance and inductance of O.H.T.L. Capacitance of O.H.T.L. Representation of O.H.T.L. Underground cables. Symmetrical faults. Power System protection Concepts. Protection of feeders, motors. Revision
T E X T B O O K
J. Glover & M.Sarma “Power system analysis and design”, PWS publishers, Boston, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
W. Stevenson & J.Grainger, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1994.
Dahr, “Computer Aided Power System Operation and Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1982.
S.K. Agarwaia, “Fundamentals of Power System”, S. Chand, 1982.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
This course is designed to give mechanical engineering students a concise and integrated treatment of the essentials of Power systems network: transmission, distribution, and short circuit analysis and protection techniques.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Elements of Power System
Week Number 2: Comparison of different transmission systems
Week Number 3: Direct current Distribution
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 174
Week Number 4: AC Distribution
Week Number 5: Mechanical Design of O.H.T.L
Week Number 6: Resistance and inductance of O.H.T.L
Week Number 7: Capacitance of O.H.T.L
Week Number 8: Representation of O.H.T.L (1).
Week Number 9: Representation of O.H.T.L (2).
Week Number 10: Underground cables
Week Number 11: Symmetrical faults (1)
Week Number 12: Symmetrical faults (2)
Week Number 13: Power system protection concepts
Week Number 14: Protection of feeders and motors
Week Number 15: General revision
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 175
EE449 – Electrical Power in Ships
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Power in Ships.
Code: EE 449
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 329
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Elements of power system. DC single and two wire distributors with concentrated loads. Uniformly loaded distributors. D.C. three wire distributor. D.C ring distributor. A.C radial distributor. A.C. ring distributor. Per- unit system. Symmetrical faults. Introduction to protection system. Fuses, circuit breakers kinds and characteristics. Current transformers. Relay kinds, characteristic and settings. Protection of synchronous generators. Protection of induction motors
T E X T B O O K
J. Glover & M.Sarma “ Power system analysis and design”, PWS publishers, Boston, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
W. Stevenson & J.Grainger, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1994.
Uppal S.L., “Electrical Power”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1998.
H.D.McGeorge, “Marine electrical equipment and practice”, Newnes, 1993.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To study a.c. and d.c. distribution system.
To investigate protective devices characteristics.
To study faults of power system and protection schemes of its components.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Elements of Power Systems
Week Number 2: DC Radial Distributors with Concentrated Loads.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 176
Week Number 3: Uniformly Loaded distributors
Week Number 4: D.C. Three Wire Distributor.
Week Number 5: DC Ring Distributor
Week Number 6: AC Radial Distributors
Week Number 7: AC Ring Distributor
Week Number 8: Cables.
Week Number 9: Per-unit system
Week Number 10: Symmetrical faults
Week Number 11: Protection elements (1)
Week Number 12: Protection elements (2)
Week Number 13: Protection elements (3)
Week Number 14: Protection of power system components (1)
Week Number 15: Protection of power system components (2)
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 177
EE 541 – Power Systems Protection II
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Power System Protection II.
Code: EE 541.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2/2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 442.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction: static/ digital vs electromechanical relays. Relaying practices. Components, detectors and applications. Hardware of digital relay. Mathematical background for digital protection. Digital O.C. relay. Digital distance relay. Digital protection of rotating machines. Digital protection of transformers. Digital bus bar protection. ntegration of protection and control in substations. Traveling wave based protection. Recent topics in digital protection
T E X T B O O K
A.T. Johns & S.K. Salman, “Digital Protection for Power System”, 1995
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
M. Chander, “Power System Protection and Switch Gears”, New Age International Limited Publishers, 2002
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Presents recent developments in the area of microprocessor relays and protection systems.
Introduces students to hardware that is suitable for use in digital relays
Introduces students to relaying algorithms and protection techniques
Outlines and mentions the role of microprocessors and computer control in power system protection
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction: static/ digital vs electromechanical relays
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 178
Week Number 2: Relaying practices
Week Number 3: Components, detectors and applications
Week Number 4: Hardware of digital relay (1)
Week Number 5: Hardware of digital relay (2)
Week Number 6: Mathematical background for digital protection (1)
Week Number 7: Mathematical background for digital protection (2)
Week Number 8: Digital O.C. relay
Week Number 9: Digital distance relay
Week Number 10: Digital protection of rotating machines
Week Number 11: Digital protection of transformers
Week Number 12: Digital bus bar protection
Week Number 13: Integration of protection and control in substations
Week Number 14: Travelling wave based protection
Week Number 15: Recent topics in digital protection
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 179
EE 542 – Electrical Power Stations
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Power Stations.
Code: EE 542
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 442
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Introduction to power stations. Loads and load curves. Power plant economies-Tariffs and power factor improvements. Selection of plants. Types of power stations: Gas turbines, thermal, hydro, steam and nuclear power stations. Hydrothermal coordination. Parallel operation of alternators. Major electrical equipments in power plants. System inter connections. New energy sources.
T E X T B O O K
Woods Woolenburg, “Power Generation, Operation and Control”, J.Willey, USA, 1993.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Dr. S. L. Uppal, “Electrical Power”, Khanna Publisher, Delhi-G, 1989.
ABB Swithgear Manual, 9th edition, 1994.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To provide the electrical students general Knowledge enabling them to understand power station & substations conceptuality.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to Power Station
Week Number 2: Types of power station.
Week Number 3: Types of substation
Week Number 4: Description of Substation
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 180
Week Number 5: Design of Substation
Week Number 6: Potential definition and calculation
Week Number 7: Earthing of Power & Substation
Week Number 8: Interlocking Principles
Week Number 9: Battery “Emergency System for Power Station
Week Number 10: Generation
Week Number 11: Economics
Week Number 12: Tariffs
Week Number 13: SCADA systems
Week Number 14: Data Monitoring
Week Number 15: Revision
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 181
EE 543 – Electrical Power Distribution
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Power Distribution.
Code: EE 543
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 441
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Distribution substation service areas. Distribution configurations. primaries design. secondary design. Voltage profiles and regulators. O.H.T.L. and equipment's - types of power transformers O.H.T.L. and equipment's - types of regulators. Underground distribution lines and switch gear – design of dis. Substation Underground distribution lines and switchgear - design of service area. compare bet. Design Capacitors and reactive power compensation - P.F. definitions. Capacitors and reactive power compensation - P.F. methods of improving P.F. Capacitors and reactive power compensation - sizing and locating of P.F. VARS. Motor control centres. Distribution substation operation.
T E X T B O O K
W. Kersting, “Distribution System Modelling & Analysis”, 2002
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
L. Heinhold, “Power Cables and their Application”, 1990.
To Langland T. Hurt , “Power Capacitors Hand Book”, 1984.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Providing details about Elec. Distribution Systems elements stating from end user up to substation distribution scheme.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Distribution system elements
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 182
Week Number 2: Distribution system configurations
Week Number 3: Distribution primaries
Week Number 4: Distribution secondaries
Week Number 5: Voltage profile and regulation
Week Number 6: O.H.T.L. and equipment
Week Number 7: Types of regulators
Week Number 8: Distribution substation design
Week Number 9: Service Area of distribution substation
Week Number 10: Distribution Substation load distributions
Week Number 11: Power factor corrections
Week Number 12: Methods of improving p.f.
Week Number 13: Locating and sizing kVARs
Week Number 14: Motor control centre (MCC)
Week Number 15: Operation of distribution substation
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 183
EE 544 – Power Systems III
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Power Systems III.
Code: EE 544.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 441.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
The concept of reliability. Components reliability-reliable and non-reliable systems. State-space method and system reliability calculations. Load forecasting and load classifications. New approach used in load forecasting. Economic dispatch of thermal units. Methods of solution of dispatching problem. Unit commitment problem. SCADA systems. Harmonics and its disadvantages. Design of harmonics filters. Distributing loads. Neural networks definition. Types of neural networks. Applications of neural networks on power systems.
T E X T B O O K
Wood and B. Wollenberg, “Power generation, operation and control”, John Wiley, 1996
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
J. Endrenyi, “Reliablity Modelling in Electric Power Systems”, A. Wiley, New York,1993
R.H. Miller and James H., “Power System Operation”, Tata McGraw-hill, 1982.
El sadek Mohamed zaki, “Power System Harmonics”, mukhtar press, 2006.
Balu,neal j, “Power System Voltage Stability”, mcgraw-hill,1994.
Coffer, alter, “Electrical Power Distribution", technical publication pune, 2007.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To introduce the student to more advanced and up-to-date topics in electric power systems, mainly reliability, forecasting, economic dispatching, SCADA, harmonics and distributing loads.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: The concept of reliability.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 184
Week Number 2: Components reliability-reliable and non-reliable systems.
Week Number 3: State-space method and system reliability calculations.
Week Number 4: Load forecasting and load classifications.
Week Number 5: New approach used in load forecasting.
Week Number 6: Economic dispatch of thermal units.
Week Number 7: Methods of solution of dispatching problem
Week Number 8: Unit commitment problem.
Week Number 9: SCADA systems
Week Number 10: Harmonics and its disadvantages.
Week Number 11: Design of harmonics filters.
Week Number 12: Distributing loads.
Week Number 13: Neural networks definition.
Week Number 14: Types of neural networks.
Week Number 15: Applications of neural networks on power systems
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 185
EE 545 – High Voltage Engineering
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: High Voltage Engineering.
Code: EE 545.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 441.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Generation of D. C. high voltage. Generation of A. C. high voltage. Generation of impulse voltage and currents. Measurements of high voltages. Sources of transient in power system. Travelling waves. Lattice diagram. Gaseous, liquid and solid Insulations study. Surge arresters. High voltage circuit breakers. Gas insulated switcher (GIS). Insulation coordination. Testing and HVDC studies.
T E X T B O O K
M. Khalif, " High Voltage Engineering ", Marcel Dekker Inc, New York, 1990
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
J. Glover & M. Sarma , “Power System Analysis and Design”, PWC Publishers, Boston, 1993.
Kuffel and W. Zaengle, “High Voltage Engineering”, Pergammon Press, U.K., 1994.
B. Gungor, “Power Systems”, TBJ Publishers, New York, 1988.
K. R. Padiyar, “HVDC Power Transmission Systems”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 1992.
M.A. Khalifa, “High Voltage Engineering, Theory and Practice”,1990
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To cover the high voltage aspects of electrical power engineering which include transient phenomena, high voltage testing and insulation coordination.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Generation of High Voltage dc
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 186
Week Number 2: Generation of AC High Voltage
Week Number 3: Generation of Impulse Voltages and Currents
Week Number 4: Measurements of High Voltages
Week Number 5: Sources of Transients in Power Systems
Week Number 6: Travelling Waves
Week Number 7: Lattice Diagram
Week Number 8: Insulations.
Week Number 9: Insulations
Week Number 10: Surge Arresters
Week Number 11: High Voltage Circuit Breakers
Week Number 12: Gas Insulated Switchgear
Week Number 13: Insulation Coordination.
Week Number 14: Testing
Week Number 15: HVDC
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 187
EE 546 – Electrical Engineering Materials
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Electrical Engineering Materials.
Code: EE 546.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 333.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Electric materials classification. Dielectrics Macroscopic & Microscopic approaches. Types of polarization – frequency response – complex permitivity. Dielectric losses and their measurements. Dielectric Breakdown (1). Dielectric Breakdown (2). Dielectric Breakdown (3). Applications of Dielectrics. Magnetic materials: Macroscopic & Microscopic approaches. Hysterisis – Magnetostriction –.Applications. Superconductivity and superconductors. Polymers and their characteristics. Ceramics and their characteristics. Optical fibers and their properties. Corrosion and cathodic protection of metals.
T E X T B O O K
Lecturer Notes.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
H. Van Vlack, “A Textbook of Materials technology”, Addison-Wesley, USA, 1987.
L. Solmar and D. Walsh, “Lectures on Electrical Properties of Matreials”, Clarendon Press, Oxford.
Kuffel and W. Zaengle,” High Voltage Engineering”,, Pergammon Press, UK, 1994.
C. S. Inulkar, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To provide a comprehensive coverage of the classification, properties and applications of electric, magnetic and super-conducting materials. The coverage includes both natural and man-made materials
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 188
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Electric materials classification
Week Number 2: Dielectrics Macroscopic & Microscopic approaches
Week Number 3: Types of polarization – frequency response – complex permitivity.
Week Number 4: Dielectric losses and their measurements.
Week Number 5: Dielectric Breakdown (1)
Week Number 6: Dielectric Breakdown (2)
Week Number 7: Dielectric Breakdown (3)
Week Number 8: Applications of Dielectrics.
Week Number 9: Magnetic materials: Macroscopic & Microscopic approaches.
Week Number 10: Hysterisis – Magnetostriction –.Applications
Week Number 11: Superconductivity and superconductors.
Week Number 12: Polymers and their characteristics.
Week Number 13: Ceramics and their characteristics.
Week Number 14: Optical fibres and their properties.
Week Number 15: Corrosion and cathodic protection of metals.
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 189
EE 547 – Utilization of Electrical Energy
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Utilization of Electrical Energy.
Code: EE 547.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 442.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Study of Illumination, Elec. Heating and Welding, direct Energy Conversion, UPS Standby power systems and lifts. Elec. Safety Engineering study.
T E X T B O O K
Lecturer Notes.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
IES Lighting Hand book, “ Illumination Engineering Society”, New york.
C.J. Erickson, “Hand book of elec. Heating for industry”, IEEE, 1994.
IEEE “Recommended practice for emergency & Standby power systems”, USA, 1987.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Illumination; properties of light, quantities and units, inverse sq. Law and cosine law. Types of lamps and their characteristics. Road lighting. Elec. Heating and welding methods. Dielectric heating, induction heating, arc induction & resistance furnaces. Batteries, fuel cells, solar cells, lifts Elec. safety engineering.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Terms used in illumination and laws of illumination
Week Number 2: Polar curves and photometry
Week Number 3: Design of illumination schemes
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 190
Week Number 4: Electric heating
Week Number 5: The arc furnaces and electric welding
Week Number 6: Comparison between AC and DC welding
Week Number 7: Ideal traction system
Week Number 8: Train movement and energy consumption
Week Number 9: Electric traction motors.
Week Number 10: Control of traction motors
Week Number 11: Electrolytic processes.
Week Number 12: Calculation of current required for depositing a metal.
Week Number 13: Refrigeration.
Week Number 14: Air conditioning.
Week Number 15: Electric safety engineering.
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 191
EE 548 – Design of Electrical and Electromechanical Systems for
Commercial and Industrial Installations
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Design of Electrical and Electromechanical Systems for Commercial and Industrial Installations
Code: EE 548
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: EE 442
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Determination of loads & Load Characteristics. Design of Industrial and Commercial Distribution Systems. Factors affecting selection of circuit arrangements, Systems, Equipment and Facilities required to satisfy functional requirements, System protection Equipment and coordination. Wiring systems : Cables and bus ways, Controllers and motor control centers. Power factor and p.f. improvement. Emergency and standby power systems. Effects of special loads, on supply voltage, Electric – arc furnaces, convertors motors. Lighting, Heating and Air-conditioning. Lifts and escalators. Grounding. Electrical safety : Fire alarm systems. Codes and Standards. Energy management.
T E X T B O O K
C. Shelton, "Electrical Installations", Longman Group
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Gupta, J.B., "Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing",S.K.Kataria, 2006
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To enable students to use standards and codes of general design in general and special design requirements in commercial and industrial applications
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Characteristics of Industrial & Commercial Loads
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 192
Week Number 2: Selection of distribution system
Week Number 3: Wiring systems
Week Number 4: Wiring systems
Week Number 5: System protection & coordination
Week Number 6: System protection & coordination
Week Number 7: Controllers & MCC
Week Number 8: Power factor and p.f. correction
Week Number 9: Lighting
Week Number 10: Heating and Air Conditioning
Week Number 11: Special Loads
Week Number 12: Lifts and escalators
Week Number 13: Grounding.
Week Number 14: Safety and Fire Alarm Safety.
Week Number 15: Codes and Standards.
Week Number 16: Final Exam
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 193
Industrial and Management Engineering Courses – IM
IM 111 – Industrial Relations
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Industrial Relations.
Code: IM 111.
Hours: Lecture – 1 Hr. Tutorial – 0 Hrs. Credit – 2.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
This course identifies the different types of industries, production techniques, management and organization structure, the different types of hazards and dangers and how to prevent them. Also it clarifies the meaning of production planning and control and cost calculations.
T E X T B O O K S
Lecture Notes
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Turner, Mize, Case & Nazemtz, "Introduction to industrial engineering", Prentice Hall, latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
To introduce students to the basis knowledge and concepts related to industrialization and work organizations, industrial health and safety, and the history of engineering and technology.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Identify the different types of industries, production techniques, and management and organization structure.
Understand the meaning of production planning and control and cost calculations.
Understand and identify the different types of hazards and dangers and to prevent them.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 194
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction to Course.
Week Number 2: Types of Industries and Production Techniques.
Week Number 3: Management and Organization Structure.
Week Number 4: Production Planning and Control.
Week Number 5: Industrial Cost Estimation Techniques.
Week Number 6: Industrial Economy and Breakeven Analysis.
Week Number 7: Exam # 1.
Week Number 8: Accidents at Work – Rules and Regulations.
Week Number 9: Hazards Classification, Prevention, and Personal Safety.
Week Number 10: Fire Hazards Identification and Prevention.
Week Number 11: Chemical Hazards and Prevention – Accident Reporting.
Week Number 12: Exam # 2.
Week Number 13: Quality Control and Labour Relations.
Week Number 14: Science, Engineering, and Technology.
Week Number 15: Industrial Revolutions.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 195
IM 112 – Manufacturing Technology
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Manufacturing Technology.
Code: IM 112.
Hours: Lecture – 1 Hr. Laboratory – 2 Hrs. Credit – 2.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
The course provides an introduction to engineering materials and their properties, production of common metals. It covers types of manufacturing, basic manufacturing processes such as casting, metal forming, welding and machining. An overview of some advanced manufacturing processes is also included. In addition, it introduces measurement standards, instruments, deviations and methods.
T E X T B O O K S
T.F. Waters and F. Waters, "Fundamentals of Manufacturing for Engineers”, Taylor & Francis, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Roy A. Lindberg, "Processes and Materials of Manufacturing", Allen and Bacon, latest edition.
E. Paul DeGarmo, et.al, "Materials and Processes in Manufacturing", Prentice Hall, latest edition.
L.E. Doyle, et.al, "Manufacturing Processes and Materials for Engineers", Prentice Hall, latest edition.
I.G. Kenaly and K.W. Harris, "Manufacturing Technology", Edward Arnolds Publisher, latest edition.
Mikell P. Groover, "Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing", Prentice Hall, latest edition.
C O U R S E A I M
Introduce the different methods for processing engineering materials and get acquainted with the basic concepts and necessary information related to manufacturing techniques.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 196
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Understanding the different stages or phases for engineering materials processing, learning the basic concepts of metal forming and casting, understanding the concepts of metal machining and welding techniques and associated applications, learning different measuring techniques and how they can be used for quality control purposes.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Production of steel and cast iron.
Week Number 2: Forming operations (Rolling – Drawing – Extrusion –Forging).
Week Number 3: Heat treatment operations (Hardening-Annealing-Tempering-Nor realizing).
Week Number 4: Cutting tools (Geometry & materials).
Week Number 5: Mechanics of metal cutting and turning operations.
Week Number 6: Cutting fluids (Function – Type – Selection).
Week Number 7: Exam # 1.
Week Number 8: Sand casting (Pattern design & mould preparations).
Week Number 9: Centrifugal casting, die casting and aspects of the casting process.
Week Number 10: Gas and Electric arc welding.
Week Number 11: Electric resistance and pressure welding and aspects of the welding process.
Week Number 12: Exam # 2
Week Number 13: Standards of measurements, Measuring Instruments.
Week Number 14: Measuring Instruments (Vernier, micrometer, dial gauge, block gauges).
Week Number 15: Measuring methods (Indirect and comparative measurements).
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 197
IM 423 – Operations Research
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Operations Research.
Code: IM 423.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: 90 Credit Hours.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
The course provides the basic concepts and fundamentals of management science, problems addressed by operations research, and problem formulations in linear programs. It includes the graphical solution of linear programs, simplex method, transportation model, assignment model, network planning, and critical path and PERT methods.
T E X T B O O K S
F. Hillier and J. Lieberman, "Introduction to Operations Research", McGraw Hill, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Hamdy Taha, "Operations Research", Prentice Hall, latest edition.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To promote the scientific approach to solve management problems.
To build up capability to construct mathematical models of practical problems and solve them.
To acknowledge the role of computer technology in solving problem of operations research.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Course Overview.
Week Number 2: Linear Programming.
Week Number 3: Graphical Method.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 198
Week Number 4: Linear Programming Applications.
Week Number 5: The Simplex Method.
Week Number 6: Transportations Method – Formulation and Initial Solution.
Week Number 7: 7th week exam Exam.
Week Number 8: Transportations Method – Finding the Optimal Solution.
Week Number 9: Assignment Method.
Week Number 10: Critical Path Method.
Week Number 11: Probabilistic Approach, Project Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT).
Week Number 12: 12th week exam Exam.
Week Number 13: Project Crashing
Week Number 14: Network Analysis – Shortest Route and Minimal Spanning Tree.
Week Number 15: Network Analysis – Maximal Flow.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 199
IM 535 – International Operations Management
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: International Operations Management.
Code: IM 535.
Hours: Lecture – 3 Hrs. Tutorial – 0 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: 126 Credit Hours.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
The course introduces the students to the concepts of international business environment, international trade and direct foreign investments, foreign exchange, and economic cooperation.
T E X T B O O K S
John D. Daniels and Lee H. Radebaugh, “International Business Environments & Operations”, Prentice Hall, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Griffin and Pustay, “International Business”, Prentice Hall, latest edition.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The objective of this course, which is a part of the college requirements, is to introduce the students from different disciplines to the ever-growing field of international business. It tackles the main issues of the evolution of firm strategy as part of the internationalization process, plus the countervailing forces that firms are likely to encounter during that process. In addition, the elements of the external international business environment are briefly introduced. The student will be better able to interact with the business world in the environment of globalization.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: International Business Environment- An overview.
Week Number 2: The Cultural and Legal Environment.
Week Number 3: The Political Environment.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 200
Week Number 4: The Economic Environment Facing Business (1).
Week Number 5: The Economic Environment Facing Business (2).
Week Number 6: International Trade Theories (1).
Week Number 7: 7th week exam Exam.
Week Number 8: International Trade Theories (2).
Week Number 9: Governmental Influence on Trade.
Week Number 10: Regional Economic Integration.
Week Number 11: Factor Mobility and Foreign Direct Investment.
Week Number 12: 12th week exam Exam.
Week Number 13: The Foreign Exchange Market.
Week Number 14: The determination of Exchange Rates.
Week Number 15: Global Manufacturing and Supply Chain management.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 201
Language, Humanities, & Social Science Courses – LH
LH 131 – ESP I
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: ESP I.
Code: LH 131.
Hours: Lecture – 3 Hrs. Credit – 2.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
T E X T B O O K S
Bockner, K. and Brown, P. Charles. Oxford English for Computing; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Oshima, Alice. Writing Academic English, New York: Pearson Education, 2006.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
References available in AAST Library.
C O U R S E A I M
The course aims at enhancing learners‟ four language skills, improving their general and technical lexical repertoire and preparing them to communicate their ideas effectively. The course is also designed to train learners to follow the principles and stages of the writing process and write academic paragraphs.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
By the end of the course, learners will be able to:
Use listening and reading strategies appropriately.
Communicate about a variety of technical topics orally.
Use basic computer terms and relevant general vocabulary meaningfully and accurately.
Apply word-formation rules of prefixation and suffixation.
Use some relevant grammatical structures.
Apply the stages of the writing process effectively.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 202
Write well-structured, unified and coherent paragraphs.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Orientation + Unit 1 (Personal Computing).
Week Number 2: Unit 1 (Personal Computing) + Unit 2 (Portable Computers).
Week Number 3: Unit 2 (Portable Computers).
Week Number 4: The process of academic writing.
Week Number 5: An overview of paragraph writing.
Week Number 6: Unit 3 (Suffixes) + Unit 4 (Programming and Languages) + Graded workshop.
Week Number 7: Unit 4 (Programming and Languages) + Progress Test I.
Week Number 8: Unity and Coherence.
Week Number 9: Coherence + Writing workshop.
Week Number 10: Unit 5 (Computer Software).
Week Number 11: Unit 6 (Computer Networks) + Graded workshop.
Week Number 12: Unit 7 (Computer Viruses) + Progress test II.
Week Number 13: Unit 7 (Computer Viruses).
Week Number 14: Unit 8 (Computers in the Office).
Week Number 15: Unit 8 (Computers in the Office) + General revision.
Week Number 16: Final exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 203
LH 132 – ESP II
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: ESP II.
Code: LH 132.
Hours: Lecture – 3 Hrs. Credit – 2.
Prerequisite: LH 131 - ESP I
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
T E X T B O O K S
Bockner, K. and Brown, P. Charles. Oxford English for Computing; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Oshima, Alice. Writing Academic English, New York: Pearson Education, 2006.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
References available in AAST Library.
C O U R S E A I M
The course aims at enabling learners to decode technical discourse in English with ease and precision. The course is also designed to enhance the learners‟ oral production and academic writing.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
By the end of the course, learners will be able to:
Use a variety of listening and reading strategies appropriately.
Communicate about numerous technical topics orally.
Use basic computer terms and relevant general vocabulary meaningfully and accurately.
Apply word-formation rules of prefixation , suffixation and compounding.
Employ a variety of relevant grammatical structures.
Write academic essays and employment correspondence.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 204
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Orientation + Unit 9 (Computers in Education).
Week Number 2: Unit 9 (Computers in Education).
Week Number 3: Paragraph writing (Concrete Support).
Week Number 4: Unit 10 (Computers in Medicine).
Week Number 5: Unit 10 (Computers in Medicine) + Essay writing (Analysis).
Week Number 6: Essay writing (Application) + Graded workshop.
Week Number 7: Unit 11 (Robotics) + Progress test I.
Week Number 8: Unit 11 (Robotics) + Summary writing.
Week Number 9: Unit 12 (Virtual Reality).
Week Number 10: Unit 12 (Virtual Reality) + Unit 13 (Machine Translation).
Week Number 11: Unit 13 (Machine Translation) + Graded workshop.
Week Number 12: CVs & letters of application + Progress test II.
Week Number 13: Interviewing skills.
Week Number 14: Unit 14 (Multimedia).
Week Number 15: Unit 14 (Multimedia) + General revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 205
LH 231 – ESP III
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: ESP III.
Code: LH 231.
Hours: Lecture – 3 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
T E X T B O O K S
Oshima, Alice. Writing Academic English, New York: Pearson Education, 2006.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Finkelstein, Leo. Pocket Book of Technical Writing for Engineers and Scientists. USA: Mc-Graw-Hill Higher Education Companies, Inc, 2000.
Riordan, Daniel G., and Stevene E. Pauley. Technical Report Writing Today. USA: Houghton Mifflin Company, 2002.
Mc Murrey. David A. Power Tools for Technical Communication. USA: Thomson Publishing Press, 2002.
Shelton, James H. Handbook for Technical Report Writing, USA : NTC Business Books, 1994.
C O U R S E A I M
The course aims at enhancing learners‟ writing skills in order to write various types of technical reports following international standards. The course also includes a component on oral presentations of reports.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
By the end of the course, learners will be able to:
Identify the different types of technical reports as well as their structure.
Write effective background reports.
Recognize the difference between instructional manuals and process description reports.
Write effective primary research (lab) and feasibility reports.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 206
Recognize the different sections of a report and how to write each.
Use a dictionary to know the different meanings of a word / phrase / expression and to differentiate between synonyms.
Summarize relevant texts.
Paraphrase relevant texts.
Include in-text citations in writing when necessary.
Document report sources.
Give oral presentations.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Orientation + Overview of technical report writing.
Week Number 2: Background reports.
Week Number 3: Process reports + Instructions and manuals.
Week Number 4: Primary research reports.
Week Number 5: Feasibility reports.
Week Number 6: Report format + Dictionary skills.
Week Number 7: Paraphrasing + Progress test I.
Week Number 8: Summarizing + Further practice on summarizing and paraphrasing.
Week Number 9: Discussion of report outlines + Presentation skills (CD viewing I).
Week Number 10: Quotations and source documentation+ Report writing workshop.
Week Number 11: Use of visual aids in technical writing + Presentation skills (CD viewing II).
Week Number 12: Report writing workshop + Progress test II.
Week Number 13: Mini presentations + Report writing workshop.
Week Number 14: Rehearsals.
Week Number 15: End- of- term presentations.
Week Number 16: Final exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 207
Mechanical Engineering Courses – ME
ME 151 - Engineering Drawings & Projection
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Engineering Drawings & Projection
Code: ME 151
Hours: Lecture – 2Hrs Tutorial – 2Hrs Credit – 2
Prerequisites: None
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Drawing practices and techniques – Geometrical constructions – Dimensioning and free hand sketching – Methods of projection – Orthogonal projection –– Sectioning and conventions – Intersection of geometrical surfaces and development – Standard metal sections and metal structures – Pictorial projection (Isometry) – Surface intersections – Perspective projection – An introduction to Computer Aided Drafting using AutoCAD.
T E X T B O O K S
Engineering Drawing Book prepared and edited from several related books.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
S. Bogolyulov a. Voinor “Engineering Drawing”, Mir publishers, Latest edition.
Thomas E. French “Eng. Drawing & Graphics Techniques”, McGraw – Hill Co, Latest edition.
Sham Tickoo, "AutoCAD 2008: A problem solving approach", Autodesk Press 2007
C O U R S E A I M
To give the student the ability to communicate by means of engineering drawing and to relate the applications of drawing techniques to mechanical engineering practice.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 208
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To provide the basic information for engineering drawing and to present the different types of drawings in generic and basic forms with enough depth.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Drawing practices and techniques (Exercises on geometrical construction)
Week Number 2: Methods of object projection (Exercises on geometrical construction – Exercises on object projection)
Week Number 3: Orthogonal projection (Exercises on orthogonal projection)
Week Number 4: Missing views, dimensioning and free hand sketching (Exercises on projection and free hand sketching)
Week Number 5: Sectioning and conventions (Exercises on sectional views)
Week Number 6: Intersection of geometrical surfaces and development (Exercises in intersection of geometrical surfaces and development)
Week Number 7: Standard metal sections and metal structures (Exercises on metal structures) – Quiz
Week Number 8: Compound metal sections and welds (Exercises on metal structures)
Week Number 9: Isometric projection (Exercises on Isometry)
Week Number 10: Isometric projection & Surface intersections (Exercises on Isometry and surface intersections)
Week Number 11: Perspective projection (Exercises on Perspective projection)
Week Number 12: Perspective projection (Cont.) (Exercises on interior and exterior perspective projection) – Quiz
Week Number 13: Computer Aided drafting using AutoCAD (General Introduction)
Week Number 14: Drawing and editing commands in AutoCAD
Week Number 15: Writing texts, Dimensioning and viewing commands
Week Number 16: Final Examination
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 209
ME 234 – Thermo Fluids
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Thermo fluids
Code: ME 234
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: BA (114) Physics 2
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Heat Engine Cycle-Steam Cycles-Positive Displacement Machine-Gas Turbine- Fluid Properties-Manometers-Hydrostatic Forces-Flow Characteristics-Continuity Equation-Bernoulli's Equation.
T E X T B O O K
C Marquand & Craft, Thermofluids, Wiley.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
T D Eastop and A McConkey “Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologists”, Longman.
J.Vernard and R.Street, “Elementary Fluid Mechanics”, J. Wiley, International Edition.
C O U R S E A I M
To give the students of electric engineering a thorough grounding in elementary subject of thermodynamics and fluid mechanics .
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
This course is an elementary course for electric engineer. It is designed to identify various aspects and areas of thermodynamics and fluid mechanics.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Heat Engine Cycles.
Week Number 2: Heat Engine Cycles.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 210
Week Number 3: Steam Cycles.
Week Number 4: Steam Cycles.
Week Number 5: Positive Displacement Machine.
Week Number 6: Positive Displacement Machine.
Week Number 7: Gas Turbine – Quiz.
Week Number 8: Gas Turbine.
Week Number 9: Fluid Properties.
Week Number 10: Manometers.
Week Number 11: Hydrostatic Forces.
Week Number 12: Hydrostatic Forces –Quiz.
Week Number 13: Flow Characteristics.
Week Number 14: Continuity Equation.
Week Number 15: Bernoulli's Equation.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 211
ME 274 - Materials Science
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Material Science
Code: ME 274
Hours: Lecture – 2Hrs Tutorial – 2Hrs Credit – 3
Prerequisites: BA 114 & BA 142
G R A D I N G
Class Performance / Attendance 10%
Midterm # 1/ Assignments : ( 7th week ) 30%
Midterm # 2/ Assignments : ( 12th week ) 20%
Final Exam 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Classification of engineering materials, metals and non-metals - Crystalline structure Properties of engineering material, mechanical properties, other properties – Testing & inspection of materials, tension test, compression test, bending test, shear test, impact test, hardness test, fatigue test – Non-destructive tests – Solidification of metals and alloys, thermal equilibrium diagrams – Heat treatment of metals and alloy– Corrosion.
T E X T B O O K S
W.D Callister “Materials Science and Engineering - an Introduction” , 4th edition , Wiley, 1997.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
J.Shackelford “ Introduction to Materials Science for Engineering” , 2nd edition , Macmillan, 1990
R.Flinn & P. Trojan “ Engineering Materials and their Applications “ 4th edition , Houghton Mifflin, 1990
B.Hull& V. John “ Non-Destructive testing “, Macmillan ,1988
C O U R S E A I M
To give the student a sound background in the science of engineering materials
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To cover the relationship between the structure & properties of engineering materials. How to modify the structure to achieve specific properties with emphasis on some typical applications.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 212
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Classification of Engineering Materials – General Introduction.
Week Number 2: Atomic Bonding in Solids.
Week Number 3: The Crystalline Structure of Materials.
Week Number 4: The Crystalline Structure of Materials.
Week Number 5: The Crystalline Structure of Materials.
Week Number 6: Properties, Testing, and Inspection of Engineering Materials.
Week Number 7: Properties, Testing, and Inspection of Engineering Materials- Quiz.
Week Number 8: Properties, Testing, and Inspection of Engineering Materials.
Week Number 9: Introduction to Thermal Equilibrium Diagrams.
Week Number 10: Introduction to Thermal Equilibrium Diagrams.
Week Number 11: Non-Destructive Testing.
Week Number 12: Heat Treatment of Metals - Quiz.
Week Number 13: Heat Treatment of Metals.
Week Number 14: Corrosion: An Introduction.
Week Number 15: General Revision.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 213
ME 425 – Power Plant Technology
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N :
Course Title: Thermal Plant Engineering
Code: ME 425
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3
Prerequisites: ME 333 or ME 234
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Thermodynamics Review (1st , 2nd laws of thermodynamics) - Steam Formation - Steam Properties and Process - Simple Rankine Cycle – Modified Rankine Cycle – Reheat and Regeneration Cycle – Steam Turbine, Steam Generator and Steam Condenser – Power Plant Control – Simple Gas Turbine Cycle – Gas Turbine Cycle with Reheat, Intercooling and Regeneration – Combined Cycle Power Plant – Nuclear Power Plant – Renewable Power Generation, Solar Energy – Wind Energy – Geothermal Energy.
T E X T B O O K S :
M.M El–Wakil,”Power Plant Technology “(1984), McGraw-Hill, 1st edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
H. Cohen, G.F.C Rogers, and H. I. H. Saravanamutto, ”Gas turbine Theroy “(1987), Longman Scientific and Technical , 3rd edition.
Kam W. Li, and Paul Priddy “Power Plant System Design” (1985), John Wiley and Sons, 1st edition.
C O U R S E A I M
Studying all types of Thermal Power Plants including:
Steam Power Plant
Gas Turbine Power Plant
Nuclear Power Plant
Wind Energy Power Plant
Geothermal Power Plant
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 214
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
To develop the student‟s capabilities to thoroughly understand the performance of the different thermal plants, Evaluate this performance, compare and choose between them.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Thermodynamics Review (1st, 2nd laws of thermodynamics)
Week Number 2: Steam Formation
Week Number 3: Steam Properties and Process
Week Number 4: Simple Rankine Cycle
Week Number 5: Modified Rankine Cycle
Week Number 6: Reheat and Regeneration Cycles
Week Number 7: Steam Turbine, Steam Generator and Steam Condenser
Week Number 8: Power Plant Control
Week Number 9: Simple Gas Turbine Cycle
Week Number 10: Gas Turbine Cycle with Reheat, Intercooling and Regeneration
Week Number 11: Combined Cycle Power Plant
Week Number 12: Nuclear Power Plant
Week Number 13: Renewable Power Generation, Solar Energy
Week Number 14: Wind Energy
Week Number 15: Geothermal Energy
Week Number 16: Final Examination
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 215
Non Engineering Courses – NE
NE 264 – Scientific Thinking
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Scientific Thinking.
Code: NE 264.
Hours: Lecture – 4 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Nature and postulates of scientific thinking, Evolution of scientific thinking, Mythical thinking, Metaphysical thinking, Superstition, Definition of Science, differences between sciences, pseudo–science and non science, characteristics of scientific thinking, Postulates of science, Objectives of science, The thinking processes, Incomplete & complete inductive reasoning mathematical induction, The meaning of mathematical sciences, Methods of Reasoning in Natural Sciences, Defining Experimentation, The difference between experimentation & observation, Defining Problem solving, The difference – reduction method, Means – Ends analysis method, Defining creative thinking and Components of creative thinking, Decision making.
T E X T B O O K S
Abdel-Moneim Hassan, Scientific Thinking
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
References available in the Academy library.
C O U R S E A I M
The main goal of the course is to develop the thinking skills of engineering and technology students.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 216
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The objectives of the course is to have students learn to define science use reasoning skills such as, analysis, synthesis, including, deducing, increasing, apply the methods science to solve problems, use creative thinking skills in real situations.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Thinking Patterns Development.
Week Number 2: Meaning & Construction of Science; Scientific Values & Directions.
Week Number 3: Science, non-science & other-than science. Engineering & Technology.
Week Number 4: Properties of science & the thinking processes.
Week Number 5: Objectives of science & postulates of scientific thinking.
Week Number 6: Mental operations used in science, scientific guessing methods of reasoning in mathematics.
Week Number 7: Types of deductions & the 7th week exam.
Week Number 8: Methods of reasoning in Natural sciences.
Week Number 9: Research methods in natural sciences.
Week Number 10: Experiments & Observations; Scientific postulates & their conditions Creative thinking.
Week Number 11: Verification of scientific postulates.
Week Number 12: Flexibility & originality.
Week Number 13: Creative thinking, fluency types.
Week Number 14: Basics of brainstorming; methods of decision making.
Week Number 15: General Revision.
Week Number 16: Final exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 217
NE 467 – Management of Energy Resources
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Management of energy resources.
Code: NE 467.
Hours: Lecture – 4 Hrs. Credit – 3.
Prerequisite: None.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
Energy for sustainable development; Metal and corrosive Environments; Strategic components of sustainable energy; Renewable energy technologies; Energy audit process and maintenance management; Lighting; Power factor correction; Control system and computers; Combustion processes and the use of industrial wastes; Heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC).
T E X T B O O K S
Energy resources and Environmental management (Handouts and ppt).
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
Available in the Academy library.
C O U R S E A I M
The main goal of this course is to let the student able to manage available energy and resources and reach sustainability.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
The objectives of the course are: energy sustainability, strategic components of sustainable energy, energy audit processes & Maintenance management and control systems and computers.
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Energy for sustainable development (1).
Week Number 2: Energy for sustainable development (2).
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 218
Week Number 3: Metal and corrosive Environments.
Week Number 4: Strategic components of sustainable energy.
Week Number 5: Renewable energy technologies (1).
Week Number 6: Renewable energy technologies (2).
Week Number 7: Exam + Introduction to Energy audit process.
Week Number 8: Introduction to Energy maintenance management.
Week Number 9: Energy audit process & maintenance management (1).
Week Number 10: Energy audit process & maintenance management (2).
Week Number 11: Lightning.
Week Number 12: Exam + Power factor correction.
Week Number 13: Control system and computers.
Week Number 14: Combustion processes & the use of industrial wastes.
Week Number 15: Heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC).
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 219
NE 364 – Engineering Economy
C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N
Course Title: Engineering Economy.
Code: NE 364.
Hours: Lecture – 2 Hrs. Tutorial – 2 Hrs. Credit – 3
Prerequisite: 54 Credit Hours.
G R A D I N G
Class Performance/Attendance: 10%
Midterm # 1/Assignments – (7th Week): 30%
Midterm # 2/Assignments – (12th Week): 20%
Final Exam: 40%
C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N
A study of basic concepts emphasizing analysis of aggregate economy. Examination of the processes of price determination and calculation of optimum demand for maximum profit. Basic principles of money-time relationship. Methods of investment assessment and fundamental techniques of comparison of investment opportunities. Theories of depreciation of physical facilities and study of cost recovery systems.
T E X T B O O K S
William G Sullivan, Elin M Wicks, & James Luxhoj, “Engineering Economy”, latest edition.
R E F E R E N C E B O O K S
E.L. Grant, W.G. Ireson, and R.S. Leavenworth, “Principles of Engineering Economy”, John Wiley and Sons, latest edition.
Chan S. Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Addison Wesley, latest edition.
C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S
Introduction basic cost concepts and economic environment.
Familiarization of the principles of money time relations and basics of investments opportunities assessment and evaluation.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 220
C O U R S E O U T L I N E
Week Number 1: Introduction and overview.
Week Number 2: Cost concepts and the economic environment.
Week Number 3: Principles of money – time relations, the concept of economic equivalence.
Week Number 4: Cash flow diagrams: Interest formulas and uniform series.
Week Number 5: Cash flow diagrams: Uniform gradient series and geometric sequence
Week Number 6: Nominal and effective interest rates, continuous compounding and continuous cash flows.
Week Number 7: Exam # 1.
Week Number 8: Applications of engineering economy: Methods of investment assessment.
Week Number 9: Comparing alternatives: Useful life is equal to the study period.
Week Number 10: Comparing alternatives: Useful life is shorter than the study period.
Week Number 11: Comparing alternatives: Useful life is longer than the study period.
Week Number 12: Exam # 2.
Week Number 13: The imputed market value technique.
Week Number 14: Depreciation: Historical Methods.
Week Number 15: Depreciation: Cost recovery systems.
Week Number 16: Final Exam.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 221
Teaching Faculty List
A list of teaching faculty staff includes: Alphabetical names (last name first), position, date, university, specialization, experience in industry, research activities.
Full Time Staff
A B U Z E I D , M A H M O U D S . ( A S S I S T A N T D E A N F O R S T U D E N T
A F F A I R S )
Ph.D. 1991, Alexandria University, Egypt.
Specialization
Electrical Machines and Drives
Experience in Industry
5 Years in Egyptian Ship Building Repair Company
1 Year in Alex National Company for Steel & Iron.
6 weeks training in TIBB Italy.
Research Activities
Permanent Magnet Stepper Motor
Controlled operation of Stand-alone Wind Driven Doubly Fed Induction Generator
A S H O U R , H A M D Y A . ( A S S O C I A T E P R O F . )
Ph.D. 1999, Heriot Watt University, UK.
Specialization
Electrical Machines and Drives and Control.
Experience in Industry
Cooperating with a specialist design and manufacturing office in some industrial projects, including control and distribution panels, uninterruptible power supply (UPS), battery chargers, DC and AC electric machine drives.
Chapter
5
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 222
Taking part in the retrofitting process of an old testing machine for boxes using computer owned by Moharm press industrial company with the cooperation of the consultant office of the AAST.
Designed and implemented practical experiments in the laboratory of the AAST.
Research Activities
Reversible DC Series Motor Drive
Operation Analysis of Load Distribution System Fed From Three Backup Sources Based on Programmable Logic Controller
Driving the Universal Motors Through a Universal Pulse Width Modulated Converter
Operation Control of Multi Level Inverters for Induction Motors
Implementation and Analysis of Microcontroller Based Soft Starters for Three Phase
Electronic Step Up/ Down Voltage Stabilizer Topology Based on H Bridge AC Chopper
Generation of DSC Based True Sinusoidal PWM Signals with the Least Number of Variables for Single, Two and Three Phase Inverters
A SCADA System for Soft Starting/ Stopping of Multi Induction Motors using a Single Soft Starter
D E S S U K I , Y A S S E R G . ( A S S I S T A N T D E A N F O R
I N T E R N A T I O N A L A F F A I R S )
Ph.D. 1998, Heriot Watt University. UK.
Specialization
Electrical Drives and Microprocessor Control
Experience in Industry
Working on Aida Ship (3)
Research Activities
Operation of a switched reluctance motor from a single phase AC supply
A novel reversible DC series motor drive
High starting performance separately excited DC motor
Artificial neural network control of vector controlled induction motor
Vector controlled induction motor drive: operation and analysis
Single Phase separately excited AC generator
Vector Control Drive of Permanent Magnet Motor Without a Shaft Encoder
Sensorless Control Drive of Permanent Magnet Motor with Online Parameter Identification
Unity Power Factor Control of Permanent Magnet Motor Drive System
E L F A H H A M , M O H A M M E D M .
Ph.D. 1985, George Washington University, USA.
Specialization
Electrical Power Systems.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 223
Experience in Industry:
Power System Analysis
Load Flow in Electrical Networks
Research Activities
Power System Analysis
Load Flow in Electrical Networks
E L K A S H L A N , A H M E D H .
Ph.D. 1984, Alexandria University, Egypt.
Specialization
Power System Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis and Renewable Energy Applications
Experience in Industry:
Control System
Advanced Control Techniques
Research Activities
Eigen Value and Controller Structure Applied on Power Syetms
Measurement Based Design and Observability Algorithm for Multi Utility Power System Operation
A Coordinated Design framework for Power System Automation
E L M O H R , I B R A H I M ( A S S I S T A N T M A N A G E R F O R
E D U C A T I O N A L A F F A I R S )
Ph. Sc., 1986, George Washington University, USA
Specialization
Power Systems
Experience in Industry:
Former Regional Advisor on Energy, UN-ESCWA
Research Activities
Power Quality of Electrical Network
Renewable Energy Systems
E L S A F T Y , S A M A H M . ( A S S I S T A N T D E A N F O R G R A D U A T E
S T U D I E S A N D R E S E A R C H )
Ph.D. 1998, Ein Shams University, Egypt.
Specialization
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 224
Distribution System and Power System Protection
Experience in Industry:
Worked in Egyptian Electricity Authority from 1988 - 1993
Research Activities
Allocation of Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs) for Fault Location in the Egyptian Network
Applying Wavelet Entropy Principle in Fault Classification
Digital Relay Performance During Power System Disturbance
E L W O G O U D , A H M E D A . ( A S S I S T A N T D E A N F O R E D U C A T I O N
A N D T R A I N I N G )
Ph.D. July 2004, Heriot Watt University, Edinburgh, U.K.
Specialization
Power Electronic Applications in power systems
Experience in Industry:
4 Years in Petroleum Field.
Research Activities
Dynamic Voltage Restorer Adopting 150 ͦ Conduction Angle VSI
Unity Power Factor Control of Permanent Magnet Motor Drive System
Three Dimension Modeling of Static Force in Permanent Magnet Linear Motor
E L Z O N K O L Y , A M A N Y H .
PhD 2003, Tanta University, Egypt.
Specialization
Power System Control and Analysis.
Experience in Industry
Advanced Control Algorithms
Genetic Engineering
Research Activities
Optimal Tuning of Lead -Lag and Fuzzy Logic Power System Stabilizer Using Particle Swarm Optimization
Optimal Sizing of SSSC Controllers to Minimize Transmission Loss and a Novel Model of SSSC to Study Transient Response
Applying Wavelet Entropy Principle in Fault Classification
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 225
G H O N E I M , W A L I D A .
Ph.D. 2003, Heriot Watt University Edinburgh, U.K.
Specialization
Electric Machine and Drive Systems and Digital Protection
Experience in Industry
1994 – 1995 Mantrac (CAT) Cater Pillar
1995 – 1996 Wepco (Phillips 66)
Research Activities
DSP control systems
Electrical Drives and Automation
Advanced Control Techniques
K H A L I L , A L A A E L - D I N A . ( A S S O C I A T E P R O F . )
Ph. D. 1999, Ain-Shams University.
Specialization
Control and Electrical Drives
Experience in Industry
Advanced Control Techniques
Electrical Drives and Automation
Research Activities
Robust Controller Design using H∞ Loop Shaping and Method of Inequalities
Microcontroller Based Hybrid Renewable Energy System.
L O T F Y , A H M E D A .
Ph. D July 1997, Alexandria University, Egypt.
Specialization
Power: (High Voltage – Power Electronics Application – Power Systems – Protection)
Experience in Industry
10 Years, Schindler Lifts.
Research Activities
FCL and FACTS combined Effects in Power Systems
Static Analysis of Voltage /Power Stability in HVDC Systems
Dynamic Voltage Stability Analysis in HVDC Systems
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 226
Load Characteristics Effect on Dynamic Voltage Stability Analysis in HVDC Systems
Mechanical Deformation and Electrical Breakdown of PEN at High Electric Fields
Voltage Stability Analysis in Multi feed HVDC Systems
Implementation of Transformer Static Differential Relay with Harmonic Blocking
S A E E D , H U S S I E N D E S S U K Y ( H E A D O F E L E C T R I C A L
E N G I N E E R I N G A N D A U T O M A T I C C O N T R O L D E P A R T M E N T )
Ph.D. 1990, Suiz University, Egypt.
Specialization
Electrical Power Systems
Experience in Industry:
Egyptian Distribution Network 1972-1990
S H A H E E N , M O S T A F A A B D E L - G E L I L
Ph.D. December 2006, University of Mannheim, Germany.
Specialization
Automatic Control and dependable systems
Automation and control application
Experience in Industry
Automation and controller design
Distribution system design
Research Activities
Application of Fuzzy Controller for Determining The Suitable Location of Shunt Capacitors in Distribution System
Real-Time Implementation of Constrained Control System on Experimental Hybrid Plant Using RT-Lab
Reliable Fault tolerant system design based on Dynamic safety margin
Z A K Z O U K , E Z Z E L D I N ( A S S I S T A N T D E A N F O R I N D U S T R I A L
E N V I R O N M E N T A N D C O M M U N I T Y S E R V I C E )
Ph.D. September 1977, Antonim Zapotocky Academy, Brno, Czechoslovakia.
Specialization
Electrical (Control System Engineering)
Experience in Industry
Problems related to Instrumentation and Control for Industrial Companies – Rakta – Moharram Printing Company, ANRPEC – Petrochemical Company.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 227
Research Activities
Application of intelligent and adaptive control techniques on power system
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 228
Assistants
A B O U S H A D Y , A H M E D A .
MSC 2008, AASTMT, Egypt.
Specialization
Electrical Drives & Machines
Automated Industrial Systems
Experience in Industry
Electrical Drives systems
Research Activities
Control on electrical drives using DSP
Control on power systems using power electronics
E L S H E N A W Y , A H M E D K .
MSC 2003, AASTMT, Egypt
Specialization
Electrical Power
Research Activities
Robotics
Advanced Control Algorithms
I B R A H I M , R A N I A A .
MSC 2007, AASTMT, Egypt
Specialization
Electrical Drives
Experience in Industry:
1 year in “Alex. Co. for Seed Processing & Derivatives”.
Research Activities
Implementation and Analysis of Microcontroller Based Soft Starters for Three Phase Induction Motors
Renewable Energy Systems
Control applications on Power systems
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 229
Department Facilities
Description of the department facilities including laboratories, workshops, computing and information facilities, and the courses supported by these facilities.
Experimental Facilities Supporting the Program
The program utilizes a number of well-equipped laboratories for instructions and research. Hands-on experience is highly emphasized throughout the program and ultra modern equipment is to serve the interests of both the students and staff. The laboratories serving the program are:
1. Electric Machine Laboratory.
2. Electrical Circuits Laboratory.
3. Digital Automatic Control Laboratory.
4. Analogue Automatic Control Lab.
5. Non- destructive Testing Laboratory.
6. Digital Automatic Control Laboratory.
7. Electrical Drives Laboratory.
8. Automation Laboratory.
9. Physics I Laboratory.
10. Physics II Laboratory.
11. Computer Laboratory.
12. Computer Laboratory II
13. Computer Laboratory III
14. Chemistry Laboratory.
15. Testing of Materials Laboratory.
16. Engineering Workshop.
17. Microprocessors Laboratory
18. Digital Circuits Laboratory
Chapter
6
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 31
Electrical Machines Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
The laboratory serves in performing the following project activities:
Unity power factor lost converter for D.C. motor.
D.C. step down chopper for D.C. motor.
Four-quadrant drive for D.C. motor.
Three-phase chopper control induction motor.
Voltage control of wind driven induction generator.
Series Motor Drive.
Three phase Wind Induction Generator Station.
Inverter Bridge leg.
Room no.: 201
Capacity: 20 students.
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Inductive Load.
D.C. machine.
AC Synch. Motor.
Power Back.
Machine Control Panel.
Electrical Motor.
Tachometer Generator.
Transformer.
Power Factor Unit.
Amplitude Meter.
Voltmeter.
Wattmeter.
Shunt Regulator.
Ammeter.
2 Speed Motor.
Synchronizing Device.
Synchronizing Unit.
Tacho Generator.
Power Electronics Components.
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 32
T H E L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
EE 321 Electrical Machine 1 5
EE 322 Electrical Machine 2 6
EE 328 Electrical Power & Machines 6
EE 329 Electrical Machines 7
EE 422 Electrical Machine 3 7
EE 424 Electrical Drivecs1 8
EE 521 Special Electrical Machine 9
EE 522 Electrical Drivecs2 10
EE 421 Power Electronics 1 6
EE 423 Power Electronics 2 7
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 33
Electrical Circuits Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
The lab provides various tests and runs numerous experiments to out the following research activities:
Making basic measurements with the HP8590 E-Series and L- Series spectrum Analyzer.
Decreasing the frequency span using the marker
Tracking unstable signals using marker track and the max. hold and min. hold function.
Tracing of the output of some power electronic circuits using the storage oscilloscope
Transferring of output data of different circuits is done using a system of storage oscilloscope and Computer PC.
Studying of different shapes available in the function generation and comparison between their average root mean square value and instantaneous values.
Room no.: 034
Capacity: 25 students
L A B O R A T O R Y E Q U I P M E N T
Spectrum Analyzers.
Digital Oscilloscopes.
Analog Oscilloscopes.
Multiplexer.
Wattmeter.
Digital power Supply.
Analog power Supply.
Function Generator.
Digital LCR Meter.
Digital Multimeter.
Analog Multimeter.
Test Boards.
T H E L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
EE 238 Electrical Eng. Fundamentals 3, 4
EE 231 Electrical Circuits 1 3
EE 236 Electrical engineering 1 4
EE 232 Electrical Circuits 2 4
EE 312 Electric Measure. & Inst. 2 5
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 234
Digital Automatic Control Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Room No.: 105
Capacity: 20 students
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Programmable Logic Controller “OMRON”
Programmable Logic Controller “SIEMENS S5-115U”
Programmable Logic Controller Trainer.
Lab-Volt 32 Bit Microprocessor Trainer
Heat Kd-ETW 3800 Microprocessor Trainer.
DC Motor Control Simulator.
Rotary Transfer Unit Simulator.
Traffic Control Simulator.
Washing Machine Simulator.
Mentor Robot Arm.
Digital Multimeter.
7 Dell OptiPlex 760, Intel Core2Duo 3.0Ghz desktop computer with USB keyboard an, optical mouse and LCD 19'' monitor
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course No. Course title Semester
EE 236 Electrical Engineering (1) 4
EE 326 Electrical Engineering (2) 6
EE 441 Power Systems (1) 6
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 235
Analogue Automatic Control Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Room No. : 103
Capacity: 20 students
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Speed & Position Control Process.
Induction Motor 3-pH Speed Control Trainer.
Process Control Simulator.
Light Control process Simulator.
Temperature Process Trainer T-3.
Pressure & Flow Process Trainer PF-2.
Level & Flow Trainer LF-1.
Computer Control Process Trainer.
Valve Calibration Trainer.
Analogue training System.
F.B. Modular Servo System.
3 Oscilloscopes.
3 Function Generators.
Frequency Sweeper.
Dead Weight Tester.
Programmable logic Controller “Siemens S-5 100U”.
3 Digital Multimeters.
4 Air Compressors.
Mini Workshop.
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course No. Course title Semester
EE 236 Electrical Engineering (1) 4
EE 326 Electrical Engineering (2) 6
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 236
Electrical Drives Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N :
Lab name : Electrical Drives Lab. Room No.: 042 Capacity : 20 students M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T S :
Dynamometer.
Digital -load cell.
Repulsion starts motor with MGB-100-DG.
Tacho Generator, DC.
Series Field Rheostat.
Tacho Generator, AC.
Injection Brake with HPT-100 Photo.
Reluctance motor with MGB-100-DG-Two.
Variable frequency driver.
Data Acquisition motor interface.
A/C D/C Power Supply
Lab view software.
Universal laboratory machine.
Four quadrant DC speed controller.
Stepper motor.
Vector drive system.
Variable extra low voltage transformer.
3 Phase Extra low voltage transformer.
Analog multi-meters.
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S :
Course No. Course Title Semester
EE424 Electrical Drive 1 8
EE522 Electrical Drive 2 9
EE521 Special Electrical Machines 9
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 237
Automation Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N :
Lab name : Automation Laboratory Room No.: 105 Capacity : 20 students M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T S :
10 PLC (Programmable Logic Controllers) Basic demo units
10 PLC simulation demo units
10 motor demo units
5 Process instrumentation demo units
5 MIMIC demo units
10 HMI (Human machine interface) demo units with TP177 package
1 PCMCIA CP Profibus
5 compressors
Cable and accessories package
Software packages
Documentation packages
10 computers
10 LCD screens
1 Laptop
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S :
Course No. Course Title Semester
EE 512 Automated Industrial Systems 1
9
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 238
Physics I Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Lab Name: Physics Lab I
Room No.: 114
Capacity: 25
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Power Supplies
Electronic Components
Boards
Laser Tubes
Function generators
Heaters
Photo Electric System
Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course no. Courses Title Semester
BA 114 Physics I 1
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 239
Physics II Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Lab Name: Physics Lab II
Room No.: 116
Capacity: 25
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Power Supplies
Heaters
Thermopiles
Boil‟s Apparatus
Function Generators
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course no. Courses Title Semester
BA 114 Physics II 2
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 240
Computer Laboratories I
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Lab Name: Lab 106
Room no.: College Engineering & Technology - 106
Capacity: 25 students
W O R K S H O P E Q U I P M E N T
Personal Computers
Microsoft Dot Net 2005 software.
T H E L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
CC 112 Structured Programming 2
CC 215 Data Structures 4
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 241
Computer Laboratories II
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Lab Name: Lab 300
Room No.: College Engineering & Technology - 300
Capacity: 25 students
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Personal Computers.
Microsoft Operating System in addition to Linux Operating System.
Microsoft Office 2007 Software.
Microsoft Dot Net Software.
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
CC 111 Introduction to Computers 1
CC 112 Structured Programming 2
CC 213 Programming Applications 3
CC 418 Operating Systems 8
CC 511 Artificial Intelligence 9
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 242
Computer Laboratories III
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Lab Name: lab 312
Room No.: College Engineering & Technology - 312
Capacity: 25 students
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Personal Computers.
Microsoft Windows Operating System.
Microsoft Office 2007.
Microsoft Dot Net Software.
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course no. Courses Title Semester
CC 111 Introduction to Computers 1
CC 112 Structured Programming 2
CC 213 Programming Applications 3
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 243
Chemistry Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Lab Name: Chemistry
Room No.: 214,150
Capacity : 25
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Chemicals and Reagents
Pippets, Burettets, Conical Flasks, Beakers, Funnels, Measuring Cylinders, Measuring Flasks.
Projector
Spectrophotometers
PH meter
Water analysis
Test Oil Sets
Sensitive Balances
Oven
Distill Water System
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course no. Courses Title Semester
BA 118 Chemistry 1st and 2nd
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 244
Testing of Materials Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
Room No.: 011
Capacity: 25
M A J O R E Q U I P M E N T
Universal testing machines
Torsion testing machine
Impact testing machine
Hardness testing machine
Heat treatment furnace
L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
ME 274 Material Science 3
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 245
Engineering Workshop
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
The workshop comprises a representative sample of most of the basic machine tools, welding and casting equipment. Its functions include the following:
Teaching experimental manufacturing courses.
Supporting students' senior project work.
Fabricating specialized apparatus and equipment.
Training purposes and imparting of skills.
Extending services to other departments within the college.
Serve maintaining the various technical units within the Academy.
Room no.: Industrial services centre (ISC)
Capacity: 50 students
W O R K S H O P E Q U I P M E N T
Turning machines (engine lathes)
Milling machines.
Drilling machines.
Grinding machines.
Tool grinder.
Shaper.
Sawing machines.
Broaching machine.
Honing machine.
Welding equipment.(Arc, Gas. Mig)
Hand tools and measuring equipment.
Educational casting kits.
Lathe dynamometers and twist drill dynamometer.
T H E L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
IM 112 Manufacturing Technology 2
IM 212 Manufacturing Processes 4
IM 213 Material Removal Processes 4
IM 314 Material Forming Processes 5
IM 501 Senior Project Part (1) 9
IM 502 Senior Project Part (2) 10
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 246
Microprocessor Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
The laboratory gives the students the opportunity to use the microprocessors kit for running several programs written in assembly language and it provides various tests and runs numerous experiments, also, it help the students to establish interfacing between computer and different input/output devices, Finally, it supports the students with all materials required to create different micro-controller chips.
Room no.: College Engineering & Technology - 326
Capacity: 25 students
L A B O R A T O R Y E Q U I P M E N T
Computer Intel P. V core 2 Duo, RAM 1 GB, HD 160GB, DVD writer.
Microcomputer Teaching System
Portable Programmer
Microprocessor Application Board
Microprocessor Training System
CPLD Card XC 9500 Complex Programmable Logic Device
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) Development Boards
ML402 Evaluation Platform with Virtex-4 XC4VLX25 and an embedded PowerPC 405 hardcore.
Spartan-3A DSP 1800A Development Board with embedded MicroBlaze Softcore.
Spartan-3 Starter Kit with XC3S200 FPGA chip and 512KB SRAM.
Data Acquisition Experiments.
Running assembly programs on 8088/86 Microprocessors boards.
T H E L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
CC 341 Digital Electronics 6
CC 411 Introduction to Microprocessor 7
CC 415 Data Acquisition Systems 8
CC 421 Introduction to Microprocessor 7
CC 514 Intelligent Robotics Elective
CC 521 Microcomputer Based Design Elective
CC 527 Computer Aided Design Elective
B . S C . P R O G R A M S T A T U S R E P O R T 2 0 0 9
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 247
Digital Circuits Laboratory
L A B O R A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
A completely equipped laboratory that contains precision measurement equipments and tools for use in digital logical experiments. The laboratory houses a collection of equipment used for the generating signals and visualizing it.
Room no.: College Engineering & Technology - 441
Capacity: 25 students
L A B O R A T O R Y E Q U I P M E N T
Programmable Logic FX12 (XV4VFX12)
Xilinx University Program Development System XUPV2P with Virtex 2 pro XC2VP30 and two embedded hardcore PowerPC 405 processors.
Programmable Logic Digilent D2FT.
Accessory Board Memory.
Accessory Board Network (NET1)
Accessory Board Digilent Analog I/O (ALO).
Logic Pulser.
Oscilloscope.
Function Generator.
T H E L A B O R A T O R Y S E R V E S T H E F O L L O W I N G C O U R S E S
Course Code Course Title Semester
CC 216 Digital Logic 4